To resize thickness, move all items on the front cover
and center registration marks to left or right.
Information
When you need repair service, call your nearest EDIROL/Roland Service Center or authorized EDIROL/Roland distributor
in your country as shown below.
EUROPE
INDIA
BRAZIL
HUNGARY
EDIROL (Europe) Ltd.
Rivera Digitec (India) Pvt. Ltd.
Roland Brasil Ltda
Roland East Europe Ltd.
Studio 3.4 114 Power Road
London W4 5PY
U. K.
TEL: +44 (0)20 8747 5949
FAX:+44 (0)20 8747 5948
http://www.edirol.com/europe
409, Nirman Kendra Mahalaxmi
Flats Compound Off. Dr. Edwin
Moses Road, Mumbai-400011,
INDIA
TEL: (022) 2493 9051
Rua San Jose, 780 Sala B
Parque Industrial San Jose
Cotia - Sao Paulo - SP, BRAZIL
TEL: (011) 4615 5666
Warehouse Area ‘DEPO’ Pf.83
H-2046 Torokbalint, HUNGARY
TEL: (23) 511011
Deutschland
TEL: 0700 33 47 65 20
France
TEL: 0810 000 371
Italia
TEL: 02 93778329
U. S. A. / CANADA
EDIROL Corporation North
America
425 Sequoia Drive, Suite 114
Bellingham, WA 98226
U. S. A.
TEL: (360) 594-4276
FAX: (360) 594-4271
http://www.edirol.com/
INDONESIA
PT Citra IntiRama
J1. Cideng Timur No. 15J-150
Jakarta Pusat
INDONESIA
TEL: (021) 6324170
KOREA
Cosmos Corporation
1461-9, Seocho-Dong,
Seocho Ku, Seoul, KOREA
TEL: (02) 3486-8855
MALAYSIA
BENTLEY MUSIC SDN BHD
140 & 142, Jalan Bukit Bintang
55100 Kuala Lumpur,MALAYSIA
TEL: (03) 2144-3333
PHILIPPINES
G.A. Yupangco & Co. Inc.
AFRICA
EGYPT
Al Fanny Trading Office
REUNION
Maison FO - YAM Marcel
25 Rue Jules Hermann,
Chaudron - BP79 97 491
Ste Clotilde Cedex,
REUNION ISLAND
TEL: (0262) 218-429
SOUTH AFRICA
That Other Music Shop
(PTY) Ltd.
11 Melle St., Braamfontein,
Johannesbourg, SOUTH AFRICA
P.O.Box 32918, Braamfontein 2017
Johannesbourg, SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: (011) 403 4105
Paul Bothner (PTY) Ltd.
17 Werdmuller Centre,
Main Road, Claremont 7708
SOUTH AFRICA
P.O.BOX 23032, Claremont 7735,
SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: (021) 674 4030
ASIA
CHINA
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
5F. No.1500 Pingliang Road
Shanghai, CHINA
TEL: (021) 5580-0800
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
(BEIJING OFFICE)
10F. No.18 Anhuaxili
Chaoyang District, Beijing,
CHINA
TEL: (010) 6426-5050
SINGAPORE
CRISTOFORI MUSIC PTE
LTD
Blk 3014, Bedok Industrial Park E,
#02-2148, SINGAPORE 489980
TEL: 6243-9555
TAIWAN
ROLAND TAIWAN
ENTERPRISE CO., LTD.
Room 5, 9fl. No. 112 Chung Shan
N.Road Sec.2, Taipei, TAIWAN,
R.O.C.
TEL: (02) 2561 3339
THAILAND
Theera Music Co. , Ltd.
330 Verng NakornKasem, Soi 2,
Bangkok 10100, THAILAND
TEL: (02) 2248821
VIETNAM
Saigon Music
138 Tran Quang Khai St.,
District 1
Ho Chi Minh City
VIETNAM
TEL: (08) 844-4068
AUSTRALIA/
NEW ZEALAND
AUSTRALIA
Roland Corporation
Australia Pty., Ltd.
38 Campbell Avenue
Dee Why West. NSW 2099
AUSTRALIA
TEL: (02) 9982 8266
NEW ZEALAND
Roland Corporation Ltd.
32 Shaddock Street, Mount Eden,
Auckland, NEW ZEALAND
TEL: (09) 3098 715
HONG KONG
CENTRAL/LATIN
AMERICA
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
Service Division
ARGENTINA
22-32 Pun Shan Street, Tsuen
Wan, New Territories,
HONG KONG
TEL: 2415 0911
Comercial Fancy II S.A.
Rut.: 96.919.420-1
Nataniel Cox #739, 4th Floor
Santiago - Centro, CHILE
TEL: (02) 688-9540
MEXICO
Casa Veerkamp, s.a. de c.v.
Roland Ireland
Audio House, Belmont Court,
Donnybrook, Dublin 4.
Republic of IRELAND
TEL: (01) 2603501
Roland Italy S. p. A.
Viale delle Industrie 8,
20020 Arese, Milano, ITALY
TEL: (02) 937-78300
IRAN
URUGUAY
Musicland Digital C.A.
Av. Francisco de Miranda,
Centro Parque de Cristal, Nivel
C2 Local 20 Caracas
VENEZUELA
TEL: (212) 285-8586
EUROPE
AUSTRIA
Roland Austria GES.M.B.H.
Siemensstrasse 4, P.O. Box 74,
A-6063 RUM, AUSTRIA
TEL: (0512) 26 44 260
JORDAN
AMMAN Trading Agency
Tecnologias Musica e Audio,
Roland Portugal, S.A.
Cais Das Pedras, 8/9-1 Dto
4050-465 PORTO
PORTUGAL
TEL: (022) 608 00 60
LEBANON
Piata Libertatii 1,
RO-4200 Gheorgheni
TEL: (066) 164-609
Chahine S.A.L.
Gerge Zeidan St., Chahine Bldg.,
Achrafieh, P.O.Box: 16-5857
Beirut, LEBANON
TEL: (01) 20-1441
MuTek
QATAR
Badie Studio & Stores
P.O. Box 62,
Doha, QATAR
TEL: 423554
SPAIN
Roland Electronics
de España, S. A.
SWEDEN
KUWAIT
Abdullah Salem Street,
Safat, KUWAIT
TEL: 243-6399
FBS LINES
FRANCE
245 Prince Mohammad St.,
Amman 1118, JORDAN
TEL: (06) 464-1200
Easa Husain Al Yousifi Est.
ROMANIA
Calle Bolivia 239, 08020
Barcelona, SPAIN
TEL: (93) 308 1000
Roland Scandinavia As,
Filial Finland
8 Retzif Ha’aliya Hashnya St.
Tel-Aviv-Yafo ISRAEL
TEL: (03) 6823666
PORTUGAL
Nordhavnsvej 7, Postbox 880,
DK-2100 Copenhagen
DENMARK
TEL: 3916 6200
FINLAND
Halilit P. Greenspoon &
Sons Ltd.
UL. Gibraltarska 4.
PL-03664 Warszawa POLAND
TEL: (022) 679 44 19
3-Bogatyrskaya Str. 1.k.l
107 564 Moscow, RUSSIA
TEL: (095) 169 5043
4, Rue Paul Henri SPAAK,
Parc de l'Esplanade, F 77 462 St.
Thibault, Lagny Cedex FRANCE
TEL: 01 600 73 500
ISRAEL
P. P. H. Brzostowicz
RUSSIA
Roland France SA
No.41 Nike St., Dr.Shariyati Ave.,
Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad
Tehran, IRAN
TEL: (021) 285-4169
POLAND
Houtstraat 3, B-2260, Oevel
(Westerlo) BELGIUM
TEL: (014) 575811
Roland Scandinavia A/S
MOCO, INC.
Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95
Lilleaker N-0216 Oslo
NORWAY
TEL: 2273 0074
BELGIUM/HOLLAND/
LUXEMBOURG
Roland Benelux N. V.
DENMARK
Radex Sound Equipment Ltd.
17, Diagorou Street, Nicosia,
CYPRUS
TEL: (022) 66-9426
Roland Scandinavia Avd.
Kontor Norge
VENEZUELA
CYPRUS
ITALY
NORWAY
Francisco Acuna de Figueroa 1771
C.P.: 11.800
Montevideo, URUGUAY
TEL: (02) 924-2335
Moon Stores
No.16, Bab Al Bahrain Avenue,
P.O.Box 247, Manama 304,
State of BAHRAIN
TEL: 211 005
IRELAND
Av. Toluca No. 323, Col. Olivar
de los Padres 01780 Mexico D.F.
MEXICO
TEL: (55) 5668-6699
Todo Musica S.A.
BAHRAIN
Owner’s Manual
Bedienungsanleitung
Mode d’emploi
Manuale d’uso
Manual del usuario
SAUDI ARABIA
aDawliah Universal
Electronics APL
Roland Scandinavia A/S
SWEDISH SALES OFFICE
Danvik Center 28, 2 tr.
S-131 30 Nacka SWEDEN
TEL: (0)8 702 00 20
Corniche Road, Aldossary Bldg.,
1st Floor, Alkhobar,
SAUDI ARABIA
P.O.Box 2154, Alkhobar 31952
SAUDI ARABIA
TEL: (03) 898 2081
SYRIA
SWITZERLAND
Roland (Switzerland) AG
Technical Light & Sound
Center
Elannontie 5
FIN-01510 Vantaa, FINLAND
TEL: (0)9 68 24 020
Landstrasse 5, Postfach,
CH-4452 Itingen,
SWITZERLAND
TEL: (061) 927-8383
GERMANY
UKRAINE
Roland Elektronische
Musikinstrumente HmbH.
TURKEY
TIC-TAC
Barkat Muzik aletleri ithalat
ve ihracat Ltd Sti
Khaled Ebn Al Walid St.
Bldg. No. 47, P.O.BOX 13520,
Damascus, SYRIA
TEL: (011) 223-5384
Oststrasse 96, 22844 Norderstedt,
GERMANY
TEL: (040) 52 60090
Mira Str. 19/108
P.O. Box 180
295400 Munkachevo, UKRAINE
TEL: (03131) 414-40
GREECE
UNITED KINGDOM
STOLLAS S.A.
Music Sound Light
Roland (U.K.) Ltd.
U.A.E.
Atlantic Close, Swansea
Enterprise Park, SWANSEA
SA7 9FJ,
UNITED KINGDOM
TEL: (01792) 702701
Zak Electronics & Musical
Instruments Co. L.L.C.
155, New National Road
Patras 26442, GREECE
TEL: 2610 435400
Owner’s Manual
9, EBN Hagar A1 Askalany Street,
ARD E1 Golf, Heliopolis,
Cairo 11341, EGYPT
TEL: 20-2-417-1828
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue
Makati, Metro Manila 1200,
PHILIPPINES
TEL: (02) 899 9801
CHILE
MIDDLE EAST
Thank you for purchasing the PCR-30/50/80 USB MIDI controller.
Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: “USING THE
UNIT SAFELY” and “IMPORTANT NOTES” (pp. 2–4). These sections
provide important information concerning the proper operation of the
unit. Additionally, in order to feel assured that you have gained a good
grasp of every feature provided by your new unit, Owner’s manual
should be read in its entirety. The manual should be saved and kept on
hand as a convenient reference.
Siraselviler Caddesi Siraselviler
Pasaji No:74/20
Taksim - Istanbul, TURKEY
TEL: (0212) 2499324
Zabeel Road, Al Sherooq Bldg.,
No. 14, Grand Floor, Dubai, U.A.E.
TEL: (04) 3360715
Instrumentos Musicales S.A.
Av.Santa Fe 2055
(1123) Buenos Aires
ARGENTINA
TEL: (011) 4508-2700
As of April 1, 2003 (EDIROL-1)
03341989
1*MP
Copyright © 2003 ROLAND CORPORATION
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in
any form without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION.
To resize thickness, move all items on the front cover
and center registration marks to left or right.
USING THE UNIT SAFELY
The
symbol alerts the user to important instructions
or warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is
determined by the design contained within the
triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for
general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of death or severe
injury should the unit be used
improperly.
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of injury or material
damage should the unit be used
improperly.
* Material damage refers
other adverse effects
respect to the home
furnishings, as well
animals or pets.
to damage or
caused with
and all its
to domestic
001
• Before using this unit, make sure to read the
instructions below, and the Owner’s Manual.
................................................................................................
002c
• Do not open (or modify in any way) the unit
or its AC adaptor.
................................................................................................
003
• Do not attempt to repair the unit, or replace
parts within it (except when this manual
provides specific instructions directing you
to do so). Refer all servicing to your retailer,
the nearest EDIROL/Roland Service Center,
or an authorized EDIROL/Roland
distributor, as listed on the "Information" page.
................................................................................................
004
• Never use or store the unit in places that are:
• Subject to temperature extremes (e.g.,
direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle, near
a heating duct, on top of heat-generating
equipment); or are
• Damp (e.g., baths, washrooms, on wet
floors); or are
• Humid; or are
• Exposed to rain; or are
• Dusty; or are
• Subject to high levels of vibration.
................................................................................................
007
The
symbol alerts the user to items that must never
be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that
must not be done is indicated by the design contained
within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it
means that the unit must never be disassembled.
• Make sure you always have the unit placed
so it is level and sure to remain stable. Never
place it on stands that could wobble, or on
inclined surfaces.
The ● symbol alerts the user to things that must be
carried out. The specific thing that must be done is
indicated by the design contained within the circle. In
the case of the symbol at left, it means that the powercord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.
008c
• Be sure to use only the AC adaptor supplied
with the unit. Also, make sure the line
voltage at the installation matches the input
voltage specified on the AC adaptor’s body.
Other AC adaptors may use a different
polarity, or be designed for a different
voltage, so their use could result in damage,
malfunction, or electric shock.
................................................................................................
009
• Do not excessively twist or bend the power
cord, nor place heavy objects on it. Doing so
can damage the cord, producing severed
elements and short circuits. Damaged cords
are fire and shock hazards!
................................................................................................
011
• Do not allow any objects (e.g., flammable
material, coins, pins); or liquids of any kind
(water, soft drinks, etc.) to penetrate the unit.
For the USA
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Tested To Comply With FCC Standards
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE
Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.
This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.
For Canada
NOTICE
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
AVIS
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
................................................................................................
012c
• Immediately turn the power off, remove the
AC adaptor from the outlet, and request
servicing by your retailer, the nearest
EDIROL/Roland Service Center, or an authorized
EDIROL/Roland distributor, as listed on the “Information” page when:
• The AC adaptor or the power-supply cord has
been damaged; or
• If smoke or unusual odor occurs
• Objects have fallen into, or liquid has been
spilled onto the unit; or
• The unit has been exposed to rain (or otherwise
has become wet); or
• The unit does not appear to operate normally or
exhibits a marked change in performance.
2
For EU Countries
This product complies with the requirements of European Directive 89/336/EEC.
For the USA
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
Compliance Information Statement
Model Name :
Type of Equipment :
Responsible Party :
Address :
Telephone :
PCR-30/50/80
USB MIDI KEYBOARD CONTROLLER
Edirol Corporation North America
425 Sequoia Drive, Suite 114, Bellingham, WA 98226
(360) 594-4276
013
• In households with small children, an adult
should provide supervision until the child is
capable of following all the rules essential for
the safe operation of the unit.
................................................................................................
014
• Protect the unit from strong impact.
(Do not drop it!)
................................................................................................
015
• Do not force the unit’s power-supply cord to
share an outlet with an unreasonable number
of other devices. Be especially careful when
using extension cords—the total power used
by all devices you have connected to the
extension cord’s outlet must never exceed the
power rating (watts/amperes) for the
extension cord. Excessive loads can cause the
insulation on the cord to heat up and
eventually melt through.
................................................................................................
016
• Before using the unit in a foreign country,
consult with your retailer, the nearest Roland
Service Center, or an authorized Roland
distributor, as listed on the "Information"
page.
................................................................................................
023
• DO NOT play a CD-ROM disc on a conventional audio CD player. The resulting sound
may be of a level that could cause permanent
hearing loss. Damage to speakers or other
system components may result.
................................................................................................
101b
• The unit and the AC adaptor should be
located so their location or position does not
interfere with their proper ventilation.
................................................................................................
102d
• Always grasp only the output plug or the
body of the AC adaptor when plugging into,
or unplugging from, this unit or an outlet.
................................................................................................
103b
• At regular intervals, you should unplug the
AC adaptor and clean it by usinga dry cloth
to wipe all dust and other accumulations
away from its prongs.Also, disconnect the
power plug from the power outlet whenever
the unit isto remain unused for an extended
period of time. Any accumulation of dustbetween the power plug and the power outlet can
result in poor insulationand lead to fire.
................................................................................................
104
• Try to prevent cords and cables from
becoming entangled. Also, all cords and
cables should be placed so they are out of the
reach of children.
................................................................................................
106
• Never climb on top of, nor place heavy
objects on the unit.
................................................................................................
107d
• Never handle the AC adaptor body, or its
output plugs, with wet hands when plugging
into, or unplugging from, an outlet or this
unit.
................................................................................................
108b
• Before moving the unit, disconnect the AC
adaptor and all cords coming from external
devices.
................................................................................................
109b
• Before cleaning the unit, turn off the power
and unplug the AC adaptor from the outlet.
................................................................................................
110b
• Whenever you suspect the possibility of
lightning in your area, disconnect the AC
adaptor from the outlet.
................................................................................................
3
IMPORTANT NOTES
291a
In addition to the items listed under “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” on page 2 -3, please read and observe the
following:
Power Supply
Maintenance
301
401a
• Do not use this unit on the same power circuit with
any device that will generate line noise (such as an
electric motor or variable lighting system).
• For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft, dry
cloth or one that has been slightly dampened with
water. To remove stubborn dirt, use a cloth impregnated with a mild, non-abrasive detergent. Afterwards, be sure to wipe the unit thoroughly with a
soft, dry cloth.
302
• The AC adaptor will begin to generate heat after
long hours of consecutive use. This is normal, and is
not a cause for concern.
307
402
• Before connecting this unit to other devices, turn off
the power to all units. This will help prevent
malfunctions and/or damage to speakers or other
devices.
• Never use benzine, thinners, alcohol or solvents of
any kind, to avoid the possibility of discoloration
and/or deformation.
Placement
352a
• This device may interfere with radio and television
reception. Do not use this device in the vicinity of
such receivers.
352b
• Noise may be produced if wireless communications
devices, such as cell phones, are operated in the
vicinity of this unit. Such noise could occur when
receiving or initiating a call, or while conversing.
Should you experience such problems, you should
relocate such wireless devices so they are at a greater
distance from this unit, or switch them off.
354a
Additional Precautions
551
• Please be aware that the contents of memory can be
irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction, or the
improper operation of the unit. To protect yourself
against the risk of loosing important data, we
recommend that you periodically save a backup
copy of important data you have stored in the unit’s
memory in another MIDI device (e.g., a sequencer).
552
• Unfortunately, it may be impossible to restore the
contents of data that was stored in another MIDI
device (e.g., a sequencer) once it has been lost.
Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning
such loss of data.
• Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight, place it
near devices that radiate heat, leave it inside an
enclosed vehicle, or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes. Excessive heat can deform or
discolor the unit.
553
• Use a reasonable amount of care when using the
unit’s buttons, sliders, or other controls; and when
using its jacks and connectors. Rough handling can
lead to malfunctions.
355b
556
• When moved from one location to another where
the temperature and/or humidity is very different,
water droplets (condensation) may form inside the
unit. Damage or malfunction may result if you
attempt to use the unit in this condition. Therefore,
before using the unit, you must allow it to stand for
several hours, until the condensation has completely
evaporated.
• When connecting / disconnecting all cables, grasp
the connector itself—never pull on the cable. This
way you will avoid causing shorts, or damage to the
cable’s internal elements.
• To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to keep the
unit’s volume at reasonable levels (especially when
it is late at night).
358
559a
• Do not allow objects to remain on top of the
keyboard. This can be the cause of malfunction, such
as keys ceasing to produce sound.
Handling CD-ROMs
801
• Avoid touching or scratching the shiny underside
(encoded surface) of the disc. Damaged or dirty
CD-ROM discs may not be read properly. Keep
your discs clean using a commercially available
CD cleaner.
4
558b
• When you need to transport the unit, package it in
the box (including padding) that it came in, if
possible. Otherwise, you will need to use equivalent
packaging materials.
561
• Use only the specified expression pedal (EV-5; sold
separately). By connecting any other expression
pedals, you risk causing malfunction and/or
damage to the unit.
Contents
Contents of the package...........................................................................9
Names of things and what they do ........................................................10
Setup ..................................................... 13
English
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Windows) .......................................14
Driver Installation .............................................................................................................. 14
Windows XP users.................................................................................................... 14
Windows 2000 users ................................................................................................. 18
Windows Me/98 users............................................................................................. 21
Settings ................................................................................................................................ 23
MIDI input and output destinations ...................................................................... 23
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Macintosh) .....................................25
Mac OS 9/8 users ............................................................................................................... 25
Installing the driver .................................................................................................. 25
Setting the driver....................................................................................................... 26
FreeMIDI settings...................................................................................................... 29
Mac OS X Users .................................................................................................................. 31
Installing the driver .................................................................................................. 31
Setting the driver....................................................................................................... 32
Deutsch
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Windows)............................33
Treiberinstallation.............................................................................................................. 33
Windows XP-Anwender.......................................................................................... 33
Windows 2000-Anwender ....................................................................................... 38
Windows Me/98-Anwender................................................................................... 42
Einstellungen ...................................................................................................................... 44
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Macintosh)..........................46
Mac OS 9/8-Benutzer ........................................................................................................ 46
Mac OS X-Benutzer............................................................................................................ 52
5
Contents
Français
Installation et configuration du pilote (Windows) ................................55
Installation du pilote.......................................................................................................... 55
Windows XP .............................................................................................................. 55
Windows 2000 ........................................................................................................... 59
Windows Me/98 ....................................................................................................... 62
Paramètres........................................................................................................................... 64
Installation et configuration du pilote (Macintosh) ..............................66
Utilisateurs Mac OS 9/8.................................................................................................... 66
Utilisateurs Mac OS X........................................................................................................ 71
Italiano
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Windows) ...........................74
Installazione del driver ..................................................................................................... 74
Utenti Windows XP .................................................................................................. 74
Utenti Windows 2000 ............................................................................................... 78
Utenti Windows Me/98 ........................................................................................... 81
Impostazioni ....................................................................................................................... 83
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Macintosh) .........................85
Utenti Mac OS 9/8 ............................................................................................................. 85
Utenti Mac OS X................................................................................................................. 91
Español
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Windows)......................94
Instalación del controlador ............................................................................................... 94
Usuarios de Windows XP ........................................................................................ 94
Usuarios de Windows 2000 ..................................................................................... 98
Usuarios de Windows Me/98 ............................................................................... 101
Configuración ................................................................................................................... 103
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Macintosh)..................105
Usuarios de Mac OS 9/8 ................................................................................................. 105
Usuarios de Mac OS X..................................................................................................... 110
6
Contents
Operation ............................................ 113
Connection and MIDI data flow ............................................................114
When using MIDI connections....................................................................................... 114
When using a USB connection ....................................................................................... 115
Basic operation......................................................................................116
How to switch modes...................................................................................................... 116
PLAY mode....................................................................................................................... 117
Controllers you can operate .................................................................................. 117
MIDI Channel mode (MIDI CH).................................................................................... 118
Program Change mode (PROGRAM CHANGE)........................................................ 119
Bank mode (BANK) ......................................................................................................... 120
Memory mode (MEMORY) ............................................................................................ 121
Snapshot mode (SNAPSHOT) ....................................................................................... 122
Panic mode (PANIC) ....................................................................................................... 123
Edit mode (EDIT)....................................................................................125
Controller settings............................................................................................................ 126
NOTE ASSIGN ........................................................................................................ 127
AFTERTOUCH ASSIGN........................................................................................ 129
CONTROL CHANGE ASSIGN ............................................................................ 132
PROGRAM CHANGE ASSIGN ........................................................................... 135
RPN/NRPN ASSIGN............................................................................................. 138
SYS EX. ASSIGN ..................................................................................................... 140
TEMPO ASSIGN ..................................................................................................... 146
NO ASSIGN ............................................................................................................. 146
ASSIGN COPY ........................................................................................................ 147
SAVE .................................................................................................................................. 148
OMNI................................................................................................................................. 149
PROTECT .......................................................................................................................... 150
BULK.................................................................................................................................. 151
Receive mode........................................................................................................... 151
Transmit mode ........................................................................................................ 153
SYSTEM ............................................................................................................................. 154
Setting method A .................................................................................................... 155
Setting method B ..................................................................................................... 155
Setting method C..................................................................................................... 155
Setting method D .................................................................................................... 156
Setting method E ..................................................................................................... 156
Setting method F ..................................................................................................... 156
7
Contents
Appendices .......................................... 157
Convenient functions............................................................................158
Setting the input mode .................................................................................................... 158
Specifying the button mode ........................................................................................... 158
Specifying the port........................................................................................................... 159
Sys Ex. ASSIGN items ..................................................................................................... 160
Specifying the checksum........................................................................................ 160
Specifying the location of the data ....................................................................... 161
Inputting channel/block data ............................................................................... 162
V-LINK mode ................................................................................................................... 163
Memory sets ..........................................................................................164
GM2 set (MEMORY: 0)........................................................................................... 164
MCR-8 MODE 3(SONAR 2) SET .......................................................................... 165
MCR-8 MODE 4(Cubase 5/SX) SET .................................................................... 166
H-COMPATIBLE (ProTools LE, Digital Performer) SET (MEMORY: 9)........ 167
GS SET ...................................................................................................................... 167
XG SET...................................................................................................................... 169
Troubleshooting ....................................................................................170
Problems related to the USB driver............................................................................... 170
Deleting the driver........................................................................................................... 173
MIDI implementation .............................................................................174
Main specifications ...............................................................................179
INDEX .....................................................................................................180
204
* Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
206j
* Windows® is known officially as: “Microsoft® Windows® operating system”.
206e
* Screen shots in this documents are reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
207
* Apple and Macintosh are registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
209
* MacOS is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
220
* All product names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective owners.
231
* OMS is a registered trademark of Opcode Systems, Inc.
232
* FreeMIDI is a trademark of Mark of the Unicorn, Inc.
8
Contents of the package
The PCR-30/50/80 includes the following items. When you open the package, first make sure that all
items are included. If any are missing, contact the dealer where you purchased the PCR-30/50/80.
●MIDI Keyboard Controller
PCR-30/50/80
fig.pcr-80
*This figure is the PCR-30.
●AC adaptor
This is the only AC adaptor you should use with the PCR-30/50/80. Do not use any AC adaptor
other than the supplied one, since doing so may cause malfunction.
●USB cable
Use this to connect the USB connector of your computer with the USB connector of the
PCR-30/50/80. For details on connections and driver installation, refer to Setup (p. 13).
* Please use only the included USB cable. If you require a replacement due to loss or damage, please contact
a “EDIROL/Roland Service Center” listed in the “Information” section at the end of this manual.
●CD-ROM
This contains drivers and editors for use with the PCR-30/50/80.
●Template sheets (two sheets)
One of these templates lists the messages that are assigned to the knobs and sliders (controllers) by
GM2 memory (memory no. 0). A blank sheet is also included for you to make a note of your own
controller settings.
●Owner’s Manual
This is the manual you are reading. Please keep it on hand for reference.
9
Names of things and what they do
Panel
fig.panelA_50
1
3
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1. Power Indicator
Lights when the power is on.
2. Controllers [R1]–[R8]
You can assign MIDI messages to these controllers.
3. V-LINK Button
Press the V-LINK button to enter V-LINK mode (p. 163). When V-LINK mode is on, the
V-LINK button will light.
V-LINK
V-LINK (
) is a function that lets you play music and images. By using this with
a V-LINK compatible video device, you can enjoy various video effects that are linked to your
performance.
4. MEMORY Button
Accesses memories that are stored within the PCR-30/50/80.
5. MIDI CH Button
Specifies the transmission channel (“current channel”) for the keyboard and bender.
6. PROGRAM CHANGE Button
Transmits program change messages on the current channel.
7. EDIT Button
Used to assign MIDI messages to the controllers.
8. DEC Button
Decreases the value of a setting by one (except in PLAY mode (p. 116)).
9. INC Button
Increases the value of a setting by one (except in PLAY mode (p. 116)).
10. HEX Button
When not in PLAY mode, sets the input mode to hexadecimal (HEX input mode).
10
Names of things and what they do
11. DECIMAL Button
When not in PLAY mode, sets the input mode to decimal (DECIMAL input mode).
12. Controllers [B1]–[B6]
You can assign MIDI messages to these controllers.
fig.panelB_50
13
14
13. Display
Indicates the current status and various other information.
USB
DATA OUT
HEX
Lights if the PCR-30/50/80 is connected to your computer via USB.
This will blink when MIDI messages are transmitted via USB or MIDI OUT.
Lights when the value shown in the display is hexadecimal.
14. Controllers [S1]–[S8]
You can assign MIDI messages to these controllers.
fig.panelC_50
15
16
17
18
15. Controllers [L1]–[L3]
You can assign MIDI messages to these
controllers.
16. TRANSPOSE/ENTER Button
Use [TRANSPOSE] + [OCTAVE -/+] to
transpose the pitch of the keyboard in semitone
steps. Also, in any mode except PLAY mode,
it functions as the [ENTER] button, which
you need to press to confirm the settings
you've made.
17. OCTAVE -/+
Press [OCTAVE -/+] to shift the pitch of the
keyboard up or down in steps of an octave.
When not in PLAY mode, use these buttons to
return to the previous setting item (the [BACK]
button) or to cancel the setting and return to
PLAY mode (the [CANCEL] button).
18. BENDER Lever
This lever can be used to modify the pitch
or apply vibrato.
11
Names of things and what they do
Rear Panel
fig.rear_50
20
21
22
23
24
25
20. Security Slot (
) [PCR-30/50]
A commercially available security lock can be attached here.
http://www.kensington.com/
21. AC adaptor jack
Connect the include AC adaptor to this jack. Insert the plug firmly so it won’t get unplugged
accidentally.
22. Power switch
DC
OFF
USB *1
Power on using the AC adaptor
Power is off
Power on using a USB cable (when not using the AC adaptor)
*1 Bus power (USB)
BUS power can be used when the PCR-30/50/80 is connected to your computer via a USB
cable. In this case, the power will be supplied from your computer via the USB cable. To use
the PCR-30/50/80 with bus power, set the power switch to USB.
* For some computers, the PCR-30/50/80 may not operate if bus power is used. In this case, use the
included AC adaptor.
23. USB connector
Use this when connecting the PCR-30/50/80 to your computer via a USB cable.
24. MIDI IN/OUT connectors
These can be connected to the MIDI connectors of other MIDI devices to transmit and receive
MIDI messages.
25. Controller [P1] and [P2]
You can connect the appropriate type of pedals to these jacks and use them as controllers.
HOLD
EXPRESSION
Connect a pedal switch to this jack and use it as a Hold pedal.
Connect an expression pedal to this jack and use it to control tone
or volume in real time.
You can also assign MIDI messages to these controllers as desired.
12
Setup
This section explains how to install the drivers needed for connecting
the PCR-30/50/80 to a computer, and make the necessary settings.
English
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Windows) .............................. (p. 14)
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Macintosh) ............................ (p. 25)
Deutsch
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Windows) .................. (p. 33)
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Macintosh) ................ (p. 46)
Français
Installation et configuration du pilote (Windows) ....................... (p. 55)
Installation et configuration du pilote (Macintosh) ..................... (p. 66)
Italiano
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Windows) ................. (p. 74)
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Macintosh) ............... (p. 85)
Español
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Windows) ............ (p. 94)
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Macintosh) .......... (p. 105)
What is a driver?
A “driver” is software that transfers data between the PCR-30/50/80 and application software
running on your computer, when your computer and the PCR-30/50/80 are connected by a
USB cable. The driver sends data from your application to the PCR-30/50/80, and from the
PCR-30/50/80 to your application.
13
Installing & Setting Up the
Driver (Windows)
Driver Installation
The installation procedure will differ depending on your system.
Please proceed to one of the following sections, depending on the system you use.
• Windows XP users ............................................... (p. 14)
• Windows 2000 users ............................................ (p. 18)
• Windows Me/98 users ........................................ (p. 21)
■ Windows XP users
1
With the PCR-30/50/80 disconnected, start up Windows.
Disconnect all USB cables except for a USB keyboard and USB mouse
(if used).
2
Open the System Properties dialog box.
1. Click the Windows Start menu, and from the menu, select Control
Panel.
If you are using Windows
XP Professional, you must
log on using a user name
with an administrative
account type (e.g.,
Administrator). For details
on user accounts, please
consult the system
administrator of your
computer.
2. In “Pick a category”, click “Performance and Maintenance”.
3. In “or pick a Control Panel icon”, click the System icon.
fig.2-1
3
Click the Hardware tab, and then
click [Driver Signing].
Open the Driver Signing Options
dialog box.
4
Make sure that “What action do
you want Windows to take?”
is set to “Ignore”.
If it is set to “Ignore”, simply
click [OK].
If it is not set to “Ignore”, make
a note of the current setting
(“Warn” or “Block”). Then change
the setting to “Ignore” and
click [OK].
14
Depending on how your
system is set up, the
System icon may be
displayed directly in the
Control Panel (the Classic
display). In this case,
double-click the System
icon.
If you changed “What
action do you want
Windows to take?” in
step 4, you must restore
the previous setting after
you have installed the
driver.
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Windows)
5
6
Click [OK] to close the System Properties dialog box.
English
Exit all currently running software (applications).
Also close any open windows. If you are using virus checking or similar
software, be sure to exit it as well.
7
Prepare the CD-ROM.
Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of your computer.
8
Deutsch
Click the Windows start button. From the menu that appears, select
“Run...”.
Open the “Run...” dialog box.
fig.2-3_30
In the dialog box that appears,
input the following into the
“Open” field, and click [OK].
Français
9
D:\Driver\USB_XP2K\SETUPINF.EXE
You are now ready to install the driver.
11 Use the USB cable to connect the PCR-30/50/80 to your computer.
1. With the power switch turned OFF, connect the AC adaptor to the
PCR-30/50/80.
2. Connect the AC adaptor to an electrical outlet.
3. Use the USB cable to connect the PCR-30/50/80 to your computer.
12 Set the PCR-30/50/80’s power switch to the ON position.
Near the task bar, your computer will indicate “Found New Hardware”.
Please wait.
Once the connections have
been completed, turn on
power to your various
devices in the order
specified. By turning on
devices in the wrong
order, you risk causing
malfunction and/or
damage to speakers and
other devices.
This unit is equipped with
a protection circuit. A brief
interval (a few seconds)
after power up is required
before the unit will operate
normally.
15
Español
10 The SetupInf dialog box will appear.
Italiano
* The drive name “D:” may be different for your system. Specify the drive name of your
CD-ROM drive.
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Windows)
13 The Found New Hardware Wizard will appear.
Make sure that the screen indicates “EDIROL PCR”, select“Install from a list
or specific location (Advanced)”, and click [Next].
fig.2-7
14 The screen will indicate “Please
choose your search and
installation options”.
Select “Don’t search. I will
choose the driver to install”,
and click [Next].
15 Make sure that the “Model” field indicates “EDIROL PCR”, and click
[Next]. Driver installation will begin.
If the “What action do you want Windows to take?” setting was not set to “Ignore”,
a “Hardware Installation” dialog box will appear.
If “What action do you want Windows to take?” is set to “Warn”
1.
Click [Continue Anyway].
2.
Continue the installation.
If “What action do you want Windows to take?” is set to “Block”
1.
Click [OK].
2.
When the “Found New Hardware Wizard” appears, click [Finish].
3.
Perform the installation as described in the “Troubleshooting” section on Device Manager
shows “?”, “!”, or “USB Composite Device” (p. 172).
fig.2-9_30
16 The Insert Disk dialog box will appear.
Click [OK].
17 The Files Needed dialog box will appear.
Input the following into the “Copy files from” field, and click [OK].
D:\Driver\USB_XP2K
* The drive name “D:” may be different for your system. Specify the drive name of your
CD-ROM drive.
16
The Insert Disk dialog
may not appear. In that
case, proceed to step 17.
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Windows)
18 The Found New Hardware Wizard will appear.
Make sure that the display indicates “EDIROL PCR”, and click [Finish].
Wait until “Found New Hardware” appears near the taskbar.
English
19 When driver installation has been completed, the System Setting Change
dialog box will appear.
Click [Yes]. Windows will restart automatically.
If you changed “What action do you want Windows to take?”
1.
Deutsch
If you changed the What action do you want Windows to take? setting, restore the
original setting after Windows restarts.
If you are using Windows XP Professional, log on to Windows using the user name
of an administrative account (e.g., Administrator).
2. Click the Windows start menu, and from the menu, select Control Panel.
3. In “Pick a category”, click “Performance and Maintenance”.
4.
In “or pick a Control Panel icon”, click the System icon. The System Properties
dialog box will appear.
Français
* Depending on how your system is set up, the System icon may be displayed directly in the Control
Panel (the Classic display). In this case, double-click the System icon.
5. Click the Hardware tab, and then click [Driver Signing]. The Driver Signing Options
dialog box will appear.
6. Return the What action do you want Windows to take? setting to the
original setting (either “Warn” or “Block”), and click [OK].
Italiano
7. Click [OK]. The System properties dialog box will close.
Español
Next, you need to make the driver settings.
(➔ MIDI input and output destinations (p. 23))
17
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Windows)
■ Windows 2000 users
1
With the PCR-30/50/80 disconnected, start up Windows.
Disconnect all USB cables except for a USB keyboard and USB mouse
(if used).
2
3
Log on to Windows as a user with administrative privileges (such as
Administrator).
Open the System Properties dialog box.
Click the Windows Start button, and from the menu that appears, select
Settings | Control Panel. In Control Panel, double-click the System icon.
fig.2-12
4
Click the Hardware tab, and then
click [Driver Signing].
Open the Driver Signing Options
dialog box.
5
Make sure that “File signature
verification” is set to “Ignore”.
If it is set to “Ignore”, simply
click [OK].
If it is not set to “Ignore”, make
a note of the current setting
(“Warn” or “Block”). Then change
the setting to “Ignore” and
click [OK].
6
Close the System Properties dialog box.
Click [OK].
7
Exit all currently running software (applications).
Also close any open windows. If you are using virus checking or similar
software, be sure to exit it as well.
8
Prepare the CD-ROM.
Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of your computer.
18
If you changed the “File
signature verification”
setting in step 5, you must
restore the previous setting
after you have installed
the driver.
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Windows)
9
Click the Windows Start button. From the menu that appears, select
“Run...”.
Open the “Run...” dialog box.
English
fig.2-14_40
10 In the dialog box that appears,
input the following into the
“Open” field, and click [OK].
* The drive name “D:” may be different for your system. Specify the drive name
of your CD-ROM drive.
11 The SetupInf dialog box will appear.
You are now ready to install the driver.
12 Use the USB cable to connect the PCR-30/50/80 to your computer.
1. With the power switch turned OFF, connect the AC adaptor to the
PCR-30/50/80.
Once the connections have
been completed, turn on
power to your various
devices in the order
specified. By turning on
devices in the wrong
order, you risk causing
malfunction and/or
damage to speakers and
other devices.
Français
Deutsch
D:\Driver\USB_XP2K\SETUPINF.EXE
2. Connect the AC adaptor to an electrical outlet.
13 Set the PCR-30/50/80’s power switch to the ON position.
This unit is equipped with
a protection circuit. A brief
interval (a few seconds)
after power up is required
before the unit will operate
normally.
Italiano
3. Use the USB cable to connect the PCR-30/50/80 to your computer.
If the “File signature verification” setting was not set to “Ignore”, a “Digital Signature
Not Found” dialog box will appear.
1.
Click [Yes].
2.
Continue the installation.
Español
If “File signature verification” is set to “Warn”
If “File signature verification” is set to “Block”
1.
Click [OK].
2.
When the “Found New Hardware Wizard” appears, click [Finish].
3.
Perform the installation as described in the “Troubleshooting” section on Device Manager
shows “?”, “!”, or “USB Composite Device” (p. 172).
19
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Windows)
14 The Insert Disk dialog box will appear.
Click [OK].
15 The Files Needed dialog box will appear.
If the Insert Disk dialog
box does not appear,
please read The “Insert
Disk” dialog box does
not appear (p. 171).
Input the following into the “Copy files from” field, and click [OK].
D:\Drivers\USB_XP2K
* The drive name “D:” may be different for your system. Specify the drive name of your
CD-ROM drive.
16 The “Found New Hardware Wizard” may be displayed.
Verify that “EDIROL PCR” is displayed, and click [Finish].
17 The System Settings Change dialog box may appear.
Click [Yes]. Windows will restart automatically.
If you changed “File signature verification”
If you changed the “File signature verification” setting, restore the original setting after
Windows restarts.
1. After Windows restarts, log in to Windows as a user with administrative privileges,
(such as Administrator).
2. In the Windows desktop, right-click the My Computer icon, and from the menu that
appears, select Properties. The System Properties dialog box will appear.
3. Click the Hardware tab, and then click [Driver signature]. The Driver Signing
Options dialog box will appear.
4. Return the “File signature verification” setting to the original setting (either “Warn”
or “Block”), and click [OK].
5. Click [OK]. The System properties dialog box will close.
Next, you need to make the driver settings.
(➔ MIDI input and output destinations (p. 23))
20
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Windows)
■ Windows Me/98 users
1
With the PCR-30/50/80 disconnected, start up Windows.
2
English
Disconnect all USB cables except for a USB keyboard and USB mouse
(if used).
Exit all currently running software (applications).
Also close any open windows. If you are using virus checking or similar
software, be sure to exit it as well.
3
Prepare the CD-ROM.
4
Deutsch
Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of your computer.
Click the Windows Start button. From the menu that appears, select
“Run...”.
Open the “Run...” dialog box.
fig.2-19a_30
In the dialog box that appears,
input the following into the
“Open” field, and click [OK].
Français
5
6
The SetupInf dialog box will appear.
You are now ready to install the driver.
7
Use the USB cable to connect the PCR-30/50/80 to your computer.
1. With the power switch turned OFF, connect the AC adaptor to the
PCR-30/50/80.
2. Connect the AC adaptor to an electrical outlet.
3. Use the USB cable to connect the PCR-30/50/80 to your computer.
8
Set the PCR-30/50/80’s power switch to the ON position.
Once the connections have
been completed, turn on
power to your various
devices in the order
specified. By turning on
devices in the wrong
order, you risk causing
malfunction and/or
damage to speakers and
other devices.
Italiano
* The drive name “D:” may be different for your system. Specify the drive name of your
CD-ROM drive.
This unit is equipped with
a protection circuit. A brief
interval (a few seconds)
after power up is required
before the unit will operate
normally.
Español
D:\Driver\USB_ME98\SETUPINF.EXE
21
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Windows)
9 The driver will be installed automatically.
10 In the dialog box, click [OK].
* If a message recommends that you restart Windows, restart Windows as directed.
Next, you need to make the driver settings.
(➔ MIDI input and output destinations (p. 23))
22
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Windows)
Settings
■ MIDI input and output destinations
Open Control Panel.
Click the Windows Start button, and from the menu that appears, select
Settings | Control Panel.
Windows XP
Click the Windows start button, and from the menu that appears, select
Control Panel.
2
Open the Sounds and Audio Devices Properties dialog box (or in
Windows 2000/Me, Sounds and Multimedia Properties).
Windows XP
In “Pick a category”, click “Sound, Speech, and Audio Devices”.
Next, in “or pick a Control Panel icon”, click the sounds and Audio
Devices icon.
Depending on how your
system is set up, the
Sounds and Audio
Devices icon may be
displayed directly in the
Control Panel (the Classic
display). In this case,
double-click the Sounds
and Audio Devices icon.
3
Français
Windows 2000/Me
In Control Panel, double-click the Sounds and Multimedia icon to open
the “Sounds and Multimedia Properties” dialog box.
Deutsch
1
English
Windows XP/2000/Me users
Click the Audio tab.
For MIDI music playback, click the ▼
located at the right of [Default device]
(or in Windows 2000/Me, [Preferred
device]), and select the MIDI device from
the list that appears.
If you want to use Media Player to play
a sound module connected to the PCR's
MIDI OUT connector, select EDIROL PCR
MIDI OUT.
5
Select the appropriate
MIDI device for your
system. You do not
necessarily have to select
EDIROL PCR MIDI OUT.
For details on port, refer
to .“About the ports
when using a USB
connection” (p. 159).
Español
4
Italiano
fig.2-28_30
Close the Sounds and Audio Devices Properties dialog box.
Click OK to complete the settings.
23
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Windows)
6
Make MIDI device settings on your sequencer software. For details on the
MIDI OUT/IN device to select, refer to About the ports when using a USB
connection (p. 159).
For details on MIDI device
settings, refer to the
owner's manual for the
software you are using.
This completes driver settings.
Windows 98 users
1
Open Control Panel.
Click the Windows Start button, and from the menu that appears, select
Settings | Control Panel.
2
Open the Multimedia Properties dialog box.
In Control Panel, double-click the Multimedia icon to open the “Multimedia
Properties” dialog box.
fig.2-29_30
3
4
Click the MIDI tab.
Set “MIDI output”.
Select [Single instrument], and select
the MIDI device from the list that
appears.
If you want to use Media Player to
play a sound module connected to the
PCR's MIDI OUT connector, select
EDIROL PCR MIDI OUT.
5
6
For details on port, refer to
“About the ports
when using a USB
connection” (p. 159).
Close the Multimedia Properties
dialog box.
Click OK to complete the settings.
Make MIDI device settings on your sequencer software. For details on the
MIDI OUT/IN device to select, refer to “About the ports when using a USB
connection” (p. 159).
This completes driver settings.
24
Select the appropriate
MIDI device for your
system. You do not
necessarily have to select
EDIROL PCR MIDI OUT.
For details on MIDI device
settings, refer to the
owner's manual for the
software you are using.
English
Installing & Setting Up the
Driver (Macintosh)
The installation procedure will differ depending on your system.
Please proceed to one of the following sections, depending on the system you use.
• Mac OS 9/8 users ................................................. (p. 25)
• Mac OS X users ..................................................... (p. 31)
Use either OMS or FreeMIDI as the MIDI driver.
The included PCR driver is an add-on module for using the PCR-30/50/80
with OMS or FreeMIDI.
* Either OMS or FreeMIDI must be installed in your Macintosh, as appropriate
for the sequencer software you are using.
* Disconnect the PCR-30/50/80 from the Macintosh before you perform the installation.
OMS can be found in the
OMS 2.3.8 E folder within
the OMS folder of the
CD-ROM. If you would
like to know more about
OMS, refer to
OMS_2.0E_Mac.pdf
which can be found in
the same folder.
If a PCR-30/50/80 is already connected to your Macintosh when you install the driver, a message
like the following will appear when the Macintosh is started up. Perform the steps described below
as appropriate for the message that is displayed.
Français
■ Installing the driver
Deutsch
Mac OS 9/8 users
Italiano
If the screen indicates:
“Driver required for USB device ‘unknown device’ is not available. Search for driver
on the Internet?”
➔ click [Cancel].
If the screen indicates:
“Software required for using device ‘unknown device’ cannot be found. Please refer
to the manual included with the device, and install the necessary software”.
➔ click [OK].
Use the following procedure to install the PCR-30/50/80 driver.
Exit all currently running software (applications).
Español
1
If you are using a virus checker or similar software, be sure to exit this as well.
2
Prepare the CD-ROM.
Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
25
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Macintosh)
3
4
Double-click the PCR Driver-E Installer icon (found in the Driver E (Mac
OS 9, 8) folder of the CD-ROM) to start up the installer.
Verify the Install Location, and click [Install].
fig.3-2_40
5
If a message like the following is
displayed, click [Continue].
The other currently running
applications will exit, and
installation will continue.
6
A dialog box will indicate Installation completed.
Click [Restart] to restart your Macintosh.
■ Setting the driver
OMS settings
1
Use the USB cable to connect the PCR-30/50/80 to your computer.
1. With the power switch turned OFF, connect the AC adaptor to the
PCR-30/50/80.
2. Connect the AC adaptor to an electrical outlet.
3. Use the USB cable to connect the PCR-30/50/80 to your computer.
2
Once the connections have
been completed, turn on
power to your various
devices in the order
specified. By turning on
devices in the wrong
order, you risk causing
malfunction and/or
damage to speakers and
other devices.
Set the PCR-30/50/80’s power switch to the ON position.
fig.3-3
3
From the CD-ROM, drag the Driver E (Mac OS 9, 8) OMS Setting folder to the hard disk of your Macintosh to
copy it.
fig.3-4
4
26
In the Opcode-OMS Application folder where you
installed OMS, double-click OMS Setup to start it up.
This unit is equipped with
a protection circuit. A brief
interval (a few seconds)
after power up is required
before the unit will operate
normally.
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Macintosh)
5
If a dialog box like the one shown
here appears, click [Turn It Off].
A confirmation dialog box will
then appear, so click [OK].
We recommend that you
turn off AppleTalk, by
selecting Chooser from
the Apple menu.
fig.3-6_35
The Create a New Studio Setup
dialog box will appear. Click
[Cancel].
If you accidentally clicked [OK],
click [Cancel] in the next screen.
Deutsch
6
English
fig.3-5_35
fig.3-8_35
7
Choose “Open” from the
File menu.
Français
From the Setting folder that
you copied in step 3, select
the PCR file, and click [Open].
A screen like the one shown
here will appear.
fig.3-9_35
Italiano
From the Edit menu, select OMS
MIDI Setup.
In the OMS MIDI Setup dialog box
that appears, check Run MIDI in
background, and click [OK].
Español
8
27
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Macintosh)
fig.3-10
9
From the File menu, choose
Make Current.
A diamond mark (◊) indicate in the settings are enabled.
If you are unable to select Make
Current, it has already been
applied, and you may continue
to the next step.
10 Verify that MIDI transmission and reception can be performed correctly.
From the Studio menu, choose Test Studio.
fig.3-22_50
11 Try playing the keyboard of the
PCR-30/50/80. If the arrow beside
number 2 or 3 in the diagram at
right blinks, the settings have been
made correctly.
When you move the mouse cursor
near the MIDI connector icon, the
cursor will change to a shape.
If a MIDI sound module is
connected to the PCR-30/50/80's
MIDI OUT connector, click the
MIDI connector icon shown in the
diagram at the right. If you hear
sound, the settings have been
made correctly.
For details on port, refer
to “About the ports
when using a USB
connection” (p. 159).
For details on connecting a
MIDI sound module, refer
to the owner's manual for
your MIDI sound module.
12 Exit OMS Setup.
From the File menu, choose [Exit]. If the AppleTalk confirmation dialog box
appears, click [OK] to close the dialog box.
13 Make MIDI device settings on your sequencer software. For details on the
MIDI OUT/IN device to select, refer to “About the ports when using a USB
connection” (p. 159).
This completes the series of steps needed to connect the PCR-30/50/80 to the
Macintosh, install the MIDI driver, and make the driver settings.
28
For details on MIDI device
settings, refer to the
owner's manual for the
software you are using.
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Macintosh)
Use the USB cable to connect the PCR-30/50/80 to your computer.
1. With the power switch turned OFF, connect the AC adaptor to the
PCR-30/50/80.
2. Connect the AC adaptor to an electrical outlet.
3. Use the USB cable to connect the PCR-30/50/80 to your computer.
5
Open the FreeMIDI Applications folder from the location into which you
installed FreeMIDI, and double-click the FreeMIDI Setup icon to start it up.
The first time you start up, use the following procedure.
1. A dialog box saying “Welcome to FreeMIDI!” will appear.
Click [Continue].
2. When the FreeMIDI Preferences dialog box appear.
Click [Cancel].
3. The About Quick Setup dialog box will appear.
Click [Cancel].
6
7
8
This unit is equipped with
a protection circuit. A brief
interval (a few seconds)
after power up is required
before the unit will operate
normally.
Deutsch
From the CD-ROM, copy the Driver E (Mac OS 9, 8) – FreeMIDI Setting
folder onto the hard disk of your Macintosh.
From the File menu, choose Open.
Select PCR from the FreeMIDI Setting folder you copied in step 3, and
click [Open].
Verify that MIDI transmission and reception occur correctly.
From the MIDI menu, choose Check Connections.
When “OMS is installed
on this computer...”
appears, click [FreeMIDI].
If you are unable to select
Open, make settings as
follows.
1. From the File menu,
choose FreeMIDI
Preference.
Français
4
Set the PCR-30/50/80’s power switch to the ON position.
Italiano
2
3
2. Uncheck “Use OMS
when available.”
3. Close FreeMIDI.
4. Return to step 4 and
continue the procedure.
29
Español
1
Once the connections have
been completed, turn on
power to your various
devices in the order
specified. By turning on
devices in the wrong
order, you risk causing
malfunction and/or
damage to speakers
and other devices.
English
■ FreeMIDI settings
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Macintosh)
fig.3-13_40
9
Try playing the keyboard of the
PCR-30/50/80. If the number 2 or 3
in the diagram at right blinks, the
settings have been made correctly.
If a MIDI sound module is
connected to the PCR-30/50/80's
MIDI OUT connector, click the
MIDI connector icon shown in the
diagram at the right. If you hear
sound, the settings have been made
correctly.
For details on port, refer to
“About the ports
when using a USB
connection” (p. 159).
For details on connecting a
MIDI sound module, refer
to the owner's manual for
your MIDI sound module.
10 Once again choose the MIDI menu command Check Connections to end
the test.
11 From the File menu, choose Quit to exit FreeMIDI Setup.
12 Make MIDI device settings on your sequencer software. For details on the
MIDI OUT/IN device to select, refer to “About the ports when using a USB
connection” (p. 159).
This completes the series of steps needed to connect the PCR-30/50/80 to the
Macintosh, install the MIDI driver, and make the driver settings.
30
For details on MIDI device
settings, refer to the
owner's manual for the
software you are using.
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Macintosh)
Mac OS X Users
1
2
English
■ Installing the driver
Disconnect all USB cables other than those for your keyboard and mouse,
and restart your Macintosh.
Prepare the CD-ROM.
Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of your computer.
In the Driver (Mac OS X) folder of the CD-ROM, double-click
PCRUSBDriver.pkg.
Deutsch
3
In Mac OS X v10.1.5, click the lock symbol for authentication.
4
5
In the authentication dialog box, input the password and click [OK].
The display will indicate “Welcome to EDIROL PCR USB Driver
installation”.
6
Français
Click [Continue].
The display will indicate “Important message”.
Read the contents and click [Continue].
7
The display will indicate “Select the location for installation”.
8
Italiano
Click the drive in which the operating system is installed to select it, and
then click [Continue].
The display will indicate “Easy installation”.
Click Install or Upgrade.
9
The display will indicate “When you install this software, you must
restart your computer after the installation is complete”.
Click [Continue installation].
Español
10 The display will indicate “The software was successfully installed”.
Click [Restart] to restart your computer.
31
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Macintosh)
Cautions when using the PCR
Before you use your sequencer software, please note the following points.
* Connect the PCR-30/50/80 to your computer via a USB cable before you start up your sequencer or other
software.
* Do not disconnect the USB cable from the PCR-30/50/80 while your sequencer or other software
is running.
* Disconnect the USB cable from the PCR-30/50/80 only after you have quit your sequencer or other
software.
* Leave the Sleep function of your Macintosh turned off.
* The PCR-30/50/80 will not work in the Classic environment of Mac OS X. Use the PCR when the Classic
environment is not running.
■ Setting the driver
1
Use the USB cable to connect the PCR-30/50/80 to your computer.
1. With the power switch turned OFF, connect the AC adaptor to the
PCR-30/50/80.
2. Connect the AC adaptor to an electrical outlet.
3. Use the USB cable to connect the PCR-30/50/80 to your computer.
2
3
Set the PCR-30/50/80’s power switch to the ON position.
Make MIDI device settings on your sequencer software. For details on the
MIDI OUT/IN device to select, refer to “About the ports when using a USB
connection” (p. 159).
This completes the series of steps needed to connect the PCR-30/50/80 to the
Macintosh, install the MIDI driver, and make the driver settings.
32
For details on MIDI device
settings, refer to the
owner's manual for the
software you are using.
Installieren und Einrichten des
Treibers (Windows)
■ Windows XP-Anwender
Starten Sie Windows, wobei das PCR-30/50/80 ausgesteckt ist.
Stecken Sie alle USB-Kabel außer der USB-Tastatur und der USB-Maus
aus (falls vorhanden).
Öffnen Sie das Dialogfeld Systemeigenschaften.
1. Klicken Sie auf die Windows-Schaltfläche [Start] und wählen Sie im
daraufhin angezeigten Menü Systemsteuerung.
2. Klicken Sie in “Wählen Sie eine Kategorie” auf “Leistung und
Wartung”.
3. Klicken Sie in “oder wählen Sie ein Systemsteuerungssymbol”
auf das Symbol System.
Abhängig von der
Konfiguration Ihres
Systems kann es vorkommen, dass das Symbol
System nicht sofort in
der Systemsteuerung
(in der klassischen
Anzeige) angezeigt wird.
Doppelklicken Sie in
diesem Fall auf das
System-Symbol.
Italiano
2
Wenn Sie Windows XP
Professional verwenden,
müssen Sie sich mit einem
Benutzernamen vom Typ
Administrationskonto
(zum Beispiel Administrator) anmelden.
Einzelheiten zu
Benutzerkonten erfahren
Sie vom Systemadministrator Ihres Computers.
Español
1
Français
Die Vorgehensweise bei der Installation hängt von Ihrem System ab.
Bitte lesen Sie abhängig von dem von Ihnen verwendeten System in einem
der folgenden Abschnitte weiter.
• Windows XP-Anwender ..................................... (S. 33)
• Windows 2000-Anwender................................... (S. 38)
• Windows Me/98-Anwender .............................. (S. 42)
Deutsch
English
Treiberinstallation
33
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Windows)
fig.2-1
3
Klicken Sie auf die Registerkarte
Hardware und klicken Sie
anschließend auf
[Treibersignierung].
Öffnen Sie das Dialogfeld
Treibersignaturoptionen.
4
Prüfen Sie, ob “Wie soll
Windows vorgehen?” auf
“Ignorieren” eingestellt ist.
Wenn “Ignorieren” eingestellt ist,
klicken Sie einfach auf [OK].
Wenn “Ignorieren” nicht
eingestellt ist, notieren Sie sich die
aktuelle Einstellung (“Warnen” oder “Sperren”). Anschließend ändern Sie
die Einstellung auf “Ignorieren” und klicken auf [OK].
5
6
Klicken Sie auf [OK], um das Dialogfeld Systemeigenschaften zu schließen.
Beenden Sie alle aktuell ausgeführten Programme (Anwendungen).
Schließen Sie außerdem alle noch geöffneten Programmfenster. Wenn Sie ein
Virenschutzprogramm oder ähnliche Software verwenden, müssen Sie diese
ebenfalls beenden.
7
Halten Sie die CD-ROM bereit.
Legen Sie die CD-ROM in das CD-ROM-Laufwerk Ihres Computers ein.
8
Klicken Sie auf die Windows-Schaltfläche Start. Wählen Sie im daraufhin
angezeigten Menü die Option “Ausführen...”.
Öffnen Sie das Dialogfeld Ausführen... .
fig.2-3_30
9
Geben Sie im angezeigten Dialogfeld
Folgendes in das Feld “Öffnen” ein
und klicken Sie auf [OK].
D:\Driver\USB_XP2K\SETUPINF.EXE
* Der Laufwerknamen “D:” kann auf Ihrem System anders lauten. Geben Sie statt
dessen den Laufwerknamen Ihres CD-ROM-Laufwerks an.
34
Wenn Sie “Wie soll
Windows vorgehen?” in
Schritt 4 geändert haben,
müssen Sie die vorherigen
Einstellungen wieder
herstellen, nachdem Sie
den Treiber installiert
haben.
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Windows)
zu verbinden.
1. Verbinden Sie bei ausgeschaltetem Netzschalter den
Wechselstromadapter mit dem PCR-30/50/80.
2. Verbinden Sie den Wechselstromadapter mit einer elektrischen
Steckdose.
3. Verwenden Sie das USB-Kabel, um das PCR-30/50/80 mit Ihrem
Computer zu verbinden.
12 Bringen Sie den Netzschalter des PCR-30/50/80 in die Position ON.
Der Computer zeigt neben der Task-Leiste folgende Meldung an: “Neue
Hardware gefunden”. Bitte warten Sie.
13 Der Assistent für das Suchen neuer Hardware erscheint.
Prüfen Sie, ob der Bildschirm “EDIROL PCR” anzeigt, wählen Sie “Software
von einer Liste oder bestimmten Quelle installieren (für fortgeschrittene
Benutzer)” und klicken Sie auf [Weiter].
Dieses Gerät ist mit
einem Schutzschaltkreis
ausgestattet. Nach dem
Einschalten benötigt das
Gerät eine kurze
Zeitspanne (einige
Sekunden), bis es den
normalen Betrieb
aufnimmt.
fig.2-7
14 Im Bildschirm wird folgende
Deutsch
11 Verwenden Sie das USB-Kabel, um das PCR-30/50/80 mit Ihrem Computer
Nachdem die Anschlüsse
fertig gestellt wurden,
schalten Sie die verschiedenen Geräte in der
angegebenen Reihenfolge
ein. Wenn Sie die Geräte in
der falschen Reihenfolge
einschalten, besteht die
Gefahr von Fehlfunktionen
und/oder Schäden an
Lautsprechern und
anderen Geräten.
Français
Jetzt kann der Treiber installiert werden.
English
10 Das Dialogfeld SetupInf wird angezeigt.
Meldung angezeigt: “Wählen
Sie die Such- und
Installationsoptionen”.
Español
Italiano
Wählen Sie “Nicht suchen.
sondern den zu installierenden
Treiber selbst wählen”, und
klicken Sie auf [Weiter].
35
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Windows)
15 Prüfen Sie, ob das Feld “Modell” “EDIROL PCR” anzeigt und klicken
Sie auf [Weiter]. Die Installation des Treibers beginnt.
Wenn die Einstellung für “Wie soll Windows vorgehen?” nicht “Ignorieren” lautet, wird
das Dialogfeld “Hardware-Installation” angezeigt.
Wenn für Wie soll Windows vorgehen? “Warnen” aktiviert wurde,
1.
klicken Sie auf [Trotzdem fortsetzen].
2.
Setzen Sie die Installation fort.
Wenn für “Wie soll Windows vorgehen?” “Sperren” aktiviert wurde,
1.
Klicken Sie auf [OK].
2.
Wenn der Assistent für das Suchen neuer Hardware erscheint, klicken Sie auf
[Beenden].
3.
Führen Sie die Installation aus, wie im Abschnitt “Fehlerbehebung” in Device Manager shows
“?”, “!”, or “USB Composite Device” (S. 172) beschrieben.
fig.2-9_30
16 Das Dialogfeld Diskette einlegen wird angezeigt.
Klicken Sie auf [OK].
17 Das Dialogfeld Benötigte Dateien wird angezeigt.
Geben Sie im angezeigten Dialogfeld Folgendes in das Feld “Dateien
kopieren von” ein und klicken Sie auf [OK].
D:\Driver\USB_XP2K
* Der Laufwerknamen “D:” kann auf Ihrem System anders lauten. Geben Sie statt
dessen den Laufwerknamen Ihres CD-ROM-Laufwerks an.
18 Der Assistent für das Suchen neuer Hardware erscheint.
Prüfen Sie, ob EDIROL PCR angezeigt wird, und klicken Sie auf [Beenden].
Warten Sie, bis die Meldung “Neue Hardware gefunden” in der Nähe der
Task-Leiste angezeigt wird.
19 Nachdem der Treiber installiert wurde, wird das Dialogfeld Geänderte
Systemeinstellungen angezeigt.
Klicken Sie auf [Ja]. Windows startet anschließend automatisch neu.
36
Das Dialogfeld Diskette
einlegen wird eventuell
nicht angezeigt. Arbeiten
Sie in diesem Fall mit
Schritt 17 weiter.
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Windows)
Wenn Sie die Einstellung für “Wie soll Windows vorgehen?” geändert haben
1.
English
Wenn Sie die Einstellung “Wie soll Windows vorgehen?” geändert haben, müssen Sie die
ursprüngliche Einstellung nach dem Neustart von Windows wiederherstellen.
Wenn Sie Windows XP Professional verwenden, melden Sie sich in Windows mit
dem Benutzernamen eines Administrationskontos an (z.B. Administrator).
2. Klicken Sie auf die Windows-Schaltfläche [Start] und wählen Sie im daraufhin
angezeigten Menü Systemsteuerung.
3. Klicken Sie in “Wählen Sie eine Kategorie” auf “Leistung und Wartung”.
Klicken Sie in “oder wählen Sie ein Systemsteuerungssymbol” auf das Symbol
System. Daraufhin werden die Systemeigenschaften angezeigt.
Deutsch
4.
* Abhängig von der Konfiguration Ihres Systems kann es vorkommen, dass das Symbol System nicht
sofort in der Systemsteuerung (in der klassischen Anzeige) angezeigt wird. Doppelklicken Sie in
diesem Fall auf das Symbol System.
5. Klicken Sie auf die Registerkarte Hardware und klicken Sie anschließend auf
[Treibersignierung]. Daraufhin werden die Treibersignaturoptionen angezeigt.
6. Stellen Sie die ursprünglichen Einstellungen für “Wie soll Windows vorgehen?”
wieder her (entweder “Warnen” oder “Sperren”) und klicken Sie auf “OK”.
Français
7. Klicken Sie auf [OK]. Das Dialogfeld Systemeigenschaften wird geschlossen.
Español
Italiano
Als nächstes nehmen Sie die Einstellungen für den Treiber vor.
(➔ Eingabe- und Ausgabeziele für MIDI (S. 44))
37
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Windows)
■ Windows 2000-Anwender
1
Starten Sie Windows, wobei das PCR-30/50/80 ausgesteckt ist.
Stecken Sie alle USB-Kabel außer der USB-Tastatur und der USB-Maus aus
(falls vorhanden).
2
3
Melden Sie sich in Windows als Benutzer mit Administratorrechten an
(z.B. als Administrator).
Öffnen Sie das Dialogfeld Systemeigenschaften.
Klicken Sie in Windows auf Start und wählen Sie im daraufhin angezeigten
Menü Einstellungen - Systemsteuerung. Doppelklicken Sie in der
Systemsteuerung auf das System-Symbol.
fig.2-12
4
Klicken Sie auf die Registerkarte
Hardware und klicken Sie
anschließend auf
[Treibersignierung].
Öffnen Sie das Dialogfeld
Treibersignaturoptionen.
5
Stellen Sie sicher, dass für
“Dateisignaturverifizierung”
“Ignorieren” aktiviert ist.
Wenn “Ignorieren” eingestellt ist,
klicken Sie einfach auf [OK].
Wenn “Ignorieren” nicht
eingestellt ist, notieren Sie sich die aktuelle Einstellung (“Warnen” oder
“Sperren”). Anschließend ändern Sie die Einstellung auf “Ignorieren” und
klicken auf [OK].
6
Schließen Sie das Dialogfeld Systemeigenschaften.
Klicken Sie auf [OK].
7
Beenden Sie alle aktuell ausgeführten Programme (Anwendungen).
Schließen Sie außerdem alle noch geöffneten Programmfenster. Wenn Sie ein
Virenschutzprogramm oder ähnliche Software verwenden, müssen Sie diese
ebenfalls beenden.
38
Wenn Sie die Einstellung
“Dateisignaturverifizierung” in Schritt 5
geändert haben, müssen
Sie die früheren Einstellungen wieder herstellen,
nachdem Sie den Treiber
installiert haben.
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Windows)
8
Halten Sie die CD-ROM bereit.
Legen Sie die CD-ROM in das CD-ROM-Laufwerk Ihres Computers ein.
9
English
Klicken Sie auf die Windows-Schaltfläche Start. Wählen Sie im daraufhin
angezeigten Menü die Option “Ausführen...”
Öffnen Sie das Dialogfeld Ausführen....
fig.2-14_40
10 Geben Sie im angezeigten
Deutsch
Dialogfeld Folgendes in das
Feld “Öffnen” ein und klicken
Sie auf [OK].
D:\Driver\USB_XP2K\SETUPINF.EXE
11 Das Dialogfeld SetupInf wird angezeigt.
Jetzt kann der Treiber installiert werden.
12 Verwenden Sie das USB-Kabel, um das PCR-30/50/80 mit Ihrem Computer
zu verbinden.
1. Verbinden Sie bei ausgeschaltetem Netzschalter den
Wechselstromadapter mit dem PCR-30/50/80.
Nachdem die Anschlüsse
fertig gestellt wurden,
schalten Sie die verschiedenen Geräte in der
angegebenen Reihenfolge
ein. Wenn Sie die Geräte in
der falschen Reihenfolge
einschalten, besteht die
Gefahr von Fehlfunktionen
und/oder Schäden an
Lautsprechern und
anderen Geräten.
Français
* Der Laufwerknamen “D:” kann auf Ihrem System anders lauten. Geben Sie statt
dessen den Laufwerknamen Ihres CD-ROM-Laufwerks an.
13 Bringen Sie den Netzschalter des PCR-30/50/80 in die Position ON.
Dieses Gerät ist mit
einem Schutzschaltkreis
ausgestattet. Nach dem
Einschalten benötigt
das Gerät eine kurze
Zeitspanne (einige
Sekunden), bis es den
normalen Betrieb
aufnimmt.
39
Español
3. Verwenden Sie das USB-Kabel, um das PCR-30/50/80 mit Ihrem
Computer zu verbinden.
Italiano
2. Verbinden Sie den Wechselstromadapter mit einer elektrischen Steckdose.
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Windows)
Wenn in für “Dateisignaturverifizierung” nicht “Ignorieren” aktiviert wurde, erscheint
die Meldung “Digitalsignatur nicht gefunden”.
Wenn für “Dateisignaturverifizierung” “Warnen” aktiviert ist,
1.
Klicken Sie auf [Ja].
2.
Setzen Sie die Installation fort.
Wenn für “Dateisignaturverifizierung” “Sperren” aktiviert ist,
1.
Klicken Sie auf [OK].
2.
Wenn der Assistent für das Suchen neuer Hardware erscheint, klicken Sie auf [Beenden].
3.
Führen Sie die Installation aus, wie im Abschnitt “Fehlerbehebung” in Device Manager shows
“?”, “!”, or “USB Composite Device” (S. 172) beschrieben.
14 Das Dialogfeld Diskette einlegen wird angezeigt.
Klicken Sie auf [OK].
15 Das Dialogfeld Benötigte Dateien wird angezeigt.
Geben Sie im angezeigten Dialogfeld Folgendes in das Feld “Dateien
kopieren von” ein und klicken Sie auf [OK].
D:\Drivers\USB_XP2K
* Der Laufwerknamen “D:” kann auf Ihrem System anders lauten. Geben Sie statt
dessen den Laufwerknamen Ihres CD-ROM-Laufwerks an.
16 Das Dialogfeld “Neue Hardware gefunden” wird eventuell angezeigt.
Prüfen Sie, ob “EDIROL PCR” angezeigt wird und klicken Sie auf
[Beenden].
17 Möglicherweise wird das Dialogfeld Geänderte Systemeinstellungen
angezeigt.
Klicken Sie auf [Ja]. Windows startet anschließend automatisch neu.
40
Wenn das Dialogfeld
Diskette einlegen nicht
angezeigt wird, lesen Sie
bitte The “Insert Disk”
dialog box does not
appear (S. 171)
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Windows)
Wenn Sie “Dateisignaturverifizierung” geändert haben
English
Wenn Sie die Einstellung für “Dateisignaturverifizierung” geändert haben, müssen Sie
die ursprüngliche Einstellung nach dem Neustart von Windows wiederherstellen.
1. Nachdem Windows neu gestartet ist, melden Sie sich als Benutzer mit
Administratorrechten an (z.B. als Administrator).
2. Klicken Sie auf dem Windows Desktop mit der rechten Maustaste auf das Symbol
Arbeitsplatz und wählen Sie im daraufhin angezeigten Menü Eigenschaften.
Daraufhin wird das Dialogfeld Systemeigenschaften angezeigt.
3. Klicken Sie auf die Registerkarte Hardware und klicken Sie anschließend auf
[Treibersignierung]. Daraufhin werden die Treibersignaturoptionen angezeigt.
Deutsch
4. Stellen Sie die ursprünglichen Einstellungen für “Dateisignaturverifizierung” wieder
her (“Warnen” oder “Sperren”) und klicken Sie auf [OK].
5. Klicken Sie auf [OK]. Das Dialogfeld Systemeigenschaften wird geschlossen.
Español
Italiano
Français
Als nächstes nehmen Sie die Einstellungen für den Treiber vor.
(➔ Eingabe- und Ausgabeziele für MIDI (S. 44))
41
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Windows)
■ Windows Me/98-Anwender
1
Starten Sie Windows, wobei das PCR-30/50/80 ausgesteckt ist.
Stecken Sie alle USB-Kabel außer der USB-Tastatur und der USB-Maus aus
(falls vorhanden).
2
Beenden Sie alle aktuell ausgeführten Programme (Anwendungen).
Schließen Sie außerdem alle noch geöffneten Programmfenster. Wenn Sie ein
Virenschutzprogramm oder ähnliche Software verwenden, müssen Sie diese
ebenfalls beenden.
3
Halten Sie die CD-ROM bereit.
Legen Sie die CD-ROM in das CD-ROM-Laufwerk Ihres Computers ein.
4
Klicken Sie auf die Windows-Schaltfläche Start. Wählen Sie im daraufhin
angezeigten Menü die Option “Ausführen...”.
Öffnen Sie das Dialogfeld Ausführen....
fig.2-19a_30
5
Geben Sie im angezeigten
Dialogfeld Folgendes in das
Feld “Öffnen” ein und klicken
Sie auf [OK].
D:\Driver\USB_ME98\SETUPINF.EXE
* Der Laufwerknamen “D:” kann auf Ihrem System anders lauten. Geben Sie statt
dessen den Laufwerknamen Ihres CD-ROM-Laufwerks an.
6
Das Dialogfeld SetupInf wird angezeigt.
Jetzt kann der Treiber installiert werden.
42
2. Verbinden Sie den Wechselstromadapter mit einer elektrischen
Steckdose.
3. Verwenden Sie das USB-Kabel, um das PCR-30/50/80 mit Ihrem
Computer zu verbinden.
Bringen Sie den Netzschalter des PCR-30/50/80 in die Position ON.
9 Der Treiber wird automatisch installiert werden.
10 Klicken Sie im Dialogfeld auf [OK].
* Wenn Sie eine Meldung erhalten, die Ihnen empfiehlt, Windows neu zu starten,
starten Sie Windows neu.
Dieses Gerät ist mit einem
Schutzschaltkreis
ausgestattet. Nach dem
Einschalten benötigt das
Gerät eine kurze
Zeitspanne (einige
Sekunden), bis es den
normalen Betrieb
aufnimmt.
Als nächstes nehmen Sie die Einstellungen für den Treiber vor.
(➔ Eingabe- und Ausgabeziele für MIDI (S. 44))
Italiano
8
Deutsch
1. Verbinden Sie bei ausgeschaltetem Netzschalter den
Wechselstromadapter mit dem PCR-30/50/80.
Nachdem die Anschlüsse
fertig gestellt wurden,
schalten Sie die
verschiedenen Geräte in
der angegebenen
Reihenfolge ein. Wenn Sie
die Geräte in der falschen
Reihenfolge einschalten,
besteht die Gefahr von
Fehlfunktionen und/oder
Schäden an Lautsprechern
und anderen Geräten.
Français
Verwenden Sie das USB-Kabel, um das PCR-30/50/80 mit Ihrem Computer
zu verbinden.
Español
7
English
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Windows)
43
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Windows)
Einstellungen
■ Eingabe- und Ausgabeziele für MIDI
Windows XP/2000/Me-Anwender
1
Öffnen Sie die Systemsteuerung.
Klicken Sie in Windows auf Start und wählen Sie im daraufhin angezeigten
Menü Einstellungen - Systemsteuerung.
Windows XP
Klicken Sie in Windows auf Start und wählen Sie im daraufhin
angezeigten Menü Systemsteuerung.
2
Öffnen Sie das Dialogfeld Eigenschaften von Sounds und Audiogeräte
(bzw. in Windows 2000/Me Eigenschaften von Sounds und Multimedia).
Windows XP
Klicken Sie in “Wählen Sie eine Kategorie” auf “Sounds, Sprachein-/
ausgabe und Audiogeräte”. Klicken Sie danach in “oder wählen Sie
ein Systemsteuerungssymbol” auf das Symbol Sounds und
Audiogeräte.
Windows 2000/Me
Doppelklicken Sie in der Systemsteuerung auf das Symbol [Sounds
und Multimedia], um das Dialogfeld Eigenschaften für Sounds und
Multimedia zu öffnen.
3
Abhängig von der
Konfiguration Ihres
Systems kann es
vorkommen, dass das
Symbol Sounds und
Audiogeräte nicht sofort
in der Systemsteuerung
(in der klassischen
Anzeige) angezeigt
wird. In diesem Fall
doppelklicken Sie auf
das Symbol Sounds
und Audiogeräte.
Klicken Sie auf die Registerkarte Audio.
fig.2-28_30
4
Klicken Sie bei MIDI-Musikwiedergabe auf
das ▼, das sich rechts von [Standardgerät]
befindet (bzw. in Windows 2000/Me rechts
von [Bevorzugtes Gerät]) und wählen
Sie das MIDI-Gerät aus der angezeigten
Liste aus.
Wenn Sie den Media Player verwenden
möchten, um ein Soundmodul abzuspielen,
das mit dem MIDI-OUT-Stecker des PCRs
verbunden ist, wählen Sie EDIROL PCR
MIDI OUT.
5
44
Wählen Sie das
entsprechende MIDI-Gerät
für Ihr System. Sie müssen
nicht unbedingt EDIROL
PCR MIDI OUT
auswählen.
Einzelheiten zu den
Anschlüssen erhalten Sie
unter “About the ports
when using a USB
connection” (S. 159).
Schließen Sie das Dialogfeld Eigenschaften von Sounds und Audiogeräte.
Klicken Sie auf [OK], um die Konfiguration abzuschließen.
6
Nehmen Sie die MIDI-Geräteeinstellungen auf Ihrer Sequenzer-Software
vor. Wenn Sie weitere Informationen zu dem MIDI OUT/IN-Gerät erhalten
möchten, lesen Sie bitte About the ports when using a USB connection
(S. 159).
Detaillierte Informationen
zu den MIDI-Geräteeinstellungen finden Sie im
Handbuch Ihrer Software.
Damit sind die Treibereinstellungen abgeschlossen.
English
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Windows)
Windows 98-Anwender
Öffnen Sie die Systemsteuerung.
Deutsch
1
Klicken Sie in Windows auf Start und wählen Sie im daraufhin angezeigten
Menü Einstellungen - Systemsteuerung.
2
Öffnen Sie das Dialogfeld Eigenschaften für Multimedia.
Doppelklicken Sie in der Systemsteuerung auf das Symbol [Multimedia],
um das Dialogfeld Eigenschaften für Multimedia zu öffnen.
Wählen Sie [Einzelnes Instrument]
und wählen Sie das MIDI-Gerät aus
der angezeigten Liste.
Wenn Sie den Media Player
verwenden möchten, um ein
Soundmodul abzuspielen, das mit
dem MIDI-OUT-Stecker des PCRs
verbunden ist, wählen Sie EDIROL
PCR MIDI OUT.
4
5
Wählen Sie das
entsprechende MIDI-Gerät
für Ihr System. Sie müssen
nicht unbedingt EDIROL
PCR MIDI OUT
auswählen.
Einzelheiten zu dem
Anschluss erhalten Sie
unter “About the ports
when using a USB
connection” (S. 159).
Italiano
Konfigurieren Sie die
“MIDI-Ausgabe”.
Schließen Sie das Dialogfeld Eigenschaften für Multimedia.
Klicken Sie auf [OK], um die Konfiguration abzuschließen.
Nehmen Sie die MIDI-Geräteeinstellungen auf Ihrer Sequenzer-Software
vor. Wenn Sie weitere Informationen zu dem MIDI OUT/IN-Gerät erhalten
möchten, lesen Sie bitte “About the ports when using a USB connection”
(S. 159).
Detaillierte Informationen
zu den MIDI-Geräteeinstellungen finden Sie im
Handbuch Ihrer Software.
Damit sind die Treibereinstellungen abgeschlossen.
45
Español
3
Français
fig.2-29_30Klicken Sie auf das Register MIDI
Installieren und Einrichten
des Treibers (Macintosh)
The installation procedure will differ depending on your system.
Please proceed to one of the following sections, depending on the system you use.
• Mac OS 9/8 users ................................................. (S. 46)
• Mac OS X users ..................................................... (S. 52)
Mac OS 9/8-Benutzer
■ Installation des Treibers
Der PCR-30/50/80 OMS-Treiber im Lieferumfang ist ein Add-On-Modul für
die Verwendung des PCR-30/50/80 mit OMS oder FreeMIDI.
* Entsprechend der von Ihnen verwendeten Sequenzer-Software muss auf Ihrem
Macintosh entweder OMS oder FreeMIDI installiert sein.
Installieren Sie den PCR-30/50/80-Treiber wie anschließend beschrieben.
OMS befindet sich im
Ordner OMS 2.3.8 E, der
sich im Ordner OMS der
CD-ROM befindet. Wenn
Sie mehr über OMS
erfahren möchten,
lesen Sie bitte die Datei
OMS_2.3_Mac.pdf
(Online-Handbuch)
im Ordner OMS2.3.8E,
der sich im Ordner OMS
der CD-ROM befindet.
* Trennen Sie das PCR-30/50/80 vom Macintosh, bevor Sie die Installation ausführen.
Wenn das PCR-30/50/80 eingeschaltet wird, wird eine Meldung ähnlich der folgenden Meldung
angezeigt, wenn der Macintosh hochgefahren wird. Gehen Sie abhängig von der angezeigten
Meldung vor wie nachfolgend beschrieben.
Wenn die Meldung lautet:
“Driver required for USB device ‘unknown device’ is not available. Search for
driver on the Internet?”
➔klicken Sie auf “Cancel”.
Wenn die Meldung lautet:
“Software required for using device ‘unknown device’ cannot be found. Please refer
to the manual included with the device, and install the necessary software”
➔ klicken Sie auf [OK].
46
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Macintosh)
1
Beenden Sie alle aktuell ausgeführten Programme (Anwendungen).
2
English
Wenn Sie ein Virenschutzprogramm oder ähnliche Software verwenden,
müssen Sie diese ebenfalls beenden.
Halten Sie die CD-ROM bereit.
Legen Sie die CD-ROM in das CD-ROM-Laufwerk ein.
4
Doppelklicken Sie auf das Symbol PCR Driver-E Installer (das sich im
Ordner Driver E (Mac OS 9, 8) -OMS auf der CD-ROM befindet), um das
Installationsprogramm zu starten.
Deutsch
3
Prüfen Sie den Installationsort und klicken Sie auf [Install]
fig.3-2_40
5
Falls eine Meldung wie abgebildet
angezeigt wird, klicken Sie auf
[Continue].
Ein Dialogfeld zeigt Folgendes an: Installation completed.
Italiano
Klicken Sie auf [Restart] , um den Macintosh neu zu starten.
Español
6
Français
Alle anderen aktuell ausgeführten
Anwendungen werden
anschließend beendet und die Installation wird fortgesetzt.
47
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Macintosh)
■ Einstellungen
OMS-Einstellungen
Bevor Sie die OMS-Einstellungen prüfen können, müssen Sie ein
MIDI-Soundmodul mit dem MIDI OUT-Anschluss des PCR-30/50/80
verbinden.
1
Verwenden Sie das USB-Kabel, um das PCR-30/50/80 mit Ihrem Computer
zu verbinden.
1. Verbinden Sie bei ausgeschaltetem Netzschalter das
Wechselstromadapter mit dem PCR-30/50/80.
2. Verbinden Sie das Wechselstromadapter mit einer elektrischen Steckdose.
3. Verwenden Sie das USB-Kabel, um das PCR-30/50/80 mit Ihrem
Computer zu verbinden.
2
Nachdem die Anschlüsse
fertig gestellt wurden,
schalten Sie die verschiedenen Geräte in der
angegebenen Reihenfolge
ein. Wenn Sie die Geräte in
der falschen Reihenfolge
einschalten, besteht die
Gefahr von Fehlfunktionen
und/oder Schäden an
Lautsprechern und
anderen Geräten.
Bringen Sie den Netzschalter des PCR-30/50/80 in die Position ON.
fig.3-3
3
Ziehen Sie den Ordner Driver E (Mac OS 9, 8) - OMS
Setting auf der CD-ROM auf die Festplatte Ihres
Macintosh, um ihn zu kopieren.
fig.3-4
4
Doppelklicken Sie im Ordner Opcode-OMS
Application, in dem Sie OMS installiert haben, auf OMS
Setup, um die Installation zu starten.
fig.3-5_35
5
48
Vergewissern Sie sich
stets, dass die Lautstärke
reduziert wurde, bevor Sie
den Netzschalter betätigen.
Beim Einschalten wird
eventuell auch dann
Sound ausgegeben, wenn
der Lautstärkeregler ganz
zurückgestellt wurde.
Das ist jedoch normal
und kein Anzeichen für
eine Fehlfunktion.
Wenn ein Dialogfeld ähnlich dem
abgebildeten Dialogfeld angezeigt
wird, klicken Sie auf [Turn It Off].
Anschließend wird ein Dialogfeld
für die Bestätigung angezeigt.
Klicken Sie hier auf [OK].
Wir empfehlen Ihnen,
AppleTalk zu
deaktivieren, indem
Sie im Apfelmenü den
Chooser auswählen.
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Macintosh)
fig.3-6_35
Das Dialogfeld Create a New
Studio Setup wird angezeigt.
Klicken Sie auf [Cancel].
Wenn Sie versehentlich auf [OK]
geklickt haben, klicken Sie im
nächsten Bildschirm auf [Cancel].
English
6
fig.3-8_35
7
Wählen Sie “Open” im Menü File.
Deutsch
Wählen Sie im Ordner Setting ,
den Sie in Schritt 3 kopiert haben,
die Datei PCR, und klicken
Sie auf [Open].
Ein Dialogfeld ähnlich dem
hier gezeigten Dialogfeld
wird angezeigt.
8
Français
fig.3-9_35
Wählen Sie im Menü Edit die
Option OMS MIDI Setup.
Italiano
Aktivieren Sie im daraufhin
angezeigten Dialogfeld OMS
MIDI Setup die Option Run MIDI
in background und klicken Sie
auf [OK].
fig.3-10
9
Wählen Sie im Menü File die
Option Make Current.
A diamond mark (◊) indicate in the settings are enabled.
Español
Wenn Sie die Option Make Current
nicht auswählen können, wurde sie
bereits angewendet und Sie können
mit dem nächsten Schritt
weiterarbeiten.
fig.3-11_50
10 Prüfen Sie, ob die MIDI-Übertragung und der MIDI-Empfang fehlerfrei
funktionieren. Wählen Sie im Menü Studio die Option Test Studio.
49
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Macintosh)
fig.3-22_50
11 Drücken Sie die Tasten des
Keyboards. Die Einstellungen
wurden korrekt durchgeführt
wenn der Pfeil neben Nummer 2
oder 3 im Diagramm rechts blinkt.
Der Mauszeiger nimmt die Form
einer Note wenn er in der Nähe
des MIDI Connector Symbols
gehalten wird.
Bei Anschluß eines MIDI
Soundmoduls über den MIDI OUT
des PCR 30/50/80 sollte bei
Klicken des Midi Symbols ein Ton erklingen.
12 Beenden Sie OMS Setup.
Wählen Sie im Menü File die Option [Exit]. Klicken Sie im Dialogfeld
AppleTalk Confirmation auf [OK], um das Dialogfeld zu schließen.
Damit wurden die Schritte ausgeführt, die erforderlich sind, um das
PCR-30/50/80 mit Ihrem Macintosh zu verbinden, die MIDI-Treiber
zu installieren und die Treiber zu konfigurieren.
50
Weitere Informationen
zum Anschluss eines
MIDI-Soundmoduls
erhalten Sie im
Benutzerhandbuch für
Ihr MIDI-Soundmodul.
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Macintosh)
2. Verbinden Sie das Wechselstromadapter mit einer elektrischen
Steckdose.
3. Verwenden Sie das USB-Kabel, um das PCR-30/50/80 mit Ihrem
Computer zu verbinden.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Bringen Sie den Netzschalter des PCR-30/50/80 in die Position ON.
Ziehen Sie den Ordner Driver E (Mac OS 9, 8) - FreeMIDI Setting auf der
CD-ROM auf die Festplatte Ihres Macintosh, um ihn zu kopieren.
Öffnen Sie den Ordner FreeMIDI Applications an dem Ort, an dem Sie
FreeMIDI installiert haben, und doppelklicken Sie auf das Symbol FreeMIDI
Setup , um die Installation zu starten.
Wenn “OMS is installed on this computer...” angezeigt wird, klicken Sie
auf [FreeMIDI].
Wenn die Software zum ersten Mal ausgeführt wird, wird das Dialogfeld
“Welcome to FreeMIDI!” angezeigt. Klicken Sie auf [Continue].
Vergewissern Sie sich stets,
dass die Lautstärke
reduziert wurde, bevor Sie
den Netzschalter betätigen.
Beim Einschalten wird
eventuell auch dann Sound
ausgegeben, wenn der
Lautstärkeregler ganz
zurückgestellt wurde.
Das ist jedoch normal und
kein Anzeichen für eine
Deutsch
1. Verbinden Sie bei ausgeschaltetem Netzschalter das
Wechselstromadapter mit dem PCR-30/50/80.
Nachdem die Anschlüsse
fertig gestellt wurden,
schalten Sie die
verschiedenen Geräte in
der angegebenen
Reihenfolge ein. Wenn Sie
die Geräte in der falschen
Reihenfolge einschalten,
besteht die Gefahr von
Fehlfunktionen und/oder
Schäden an Lautsprechern
und anderen Geräten.
Français
Verwenden Sie das USB-Kabel, um das PCR-30/50/80 mit Ihrem Computer
zu verbinden.
Fehlfunktion.
Wenn das Dialogfeld FreeMIDI Preferences angezeigt wird, klicken Sie
auf [Cancel].
Italiano
1
English
Einstellungen für FreeMIDI
Wenn das Dialogfeld About Quick Setup angezeigt wird, klicken Sie
auf [Cancel].
9 Wählen Sie im Menü File die Option Open.
10 Wählen Sie im Ordner FreeMIDI Setting , den Sie in Schritt 3 kopiert haben,
Español
die Datei PCR, und klicken Sie auf [Open].
11 Prüfen Sie, ob die MIDI-Übertragung und der MIDI-Empfang fehlerfrei
erfolgen.Wählen Sie im Menü MIDI die Option Check Connections.
51
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Macintosh)
fig.3-13_40
12 Bei Anschluß eines MIDI
Soundmoduls über den MIDI OUT
des PCR 30/50/80 sollte bei Klicken
des Midi Symbols ein Ton erklingen.
13 Wählen Sie im Menü MIDI erneut den Befehl Check Connections, um den
Test zu beenden.
14 Wählen Sie im Menü File die Option Quit, um FreeMIDI Setup zu beenden.
Damit wurden die Schritte ausgeführt, die erforderlich sind, um das
PCR-30/50/80 mit Ihrem Macintosh zu verbinden, die MIDI-Treiber
zu installieren und die Treiber zu konfigurieren.
Mac OS X-Benutzer
■ Installation des Treibers
1
2
Stecken Sie alle USB-Kabel außer der Tastatur und der Maus aus, und
starten Sie den Macintosh neu.
Halten Sie die CD-ROM bereit.
Legen Sie die CD-ROM in das CD-ROM-Laufwerk Ihres Computers ein.
3
Doppelklicken Sie im Ordner Driver (Mac OS X) auf der CD-ROM auf
PCRUSBDriver.pkg.
Klicken Sie unter Mac OS X v10.1.5 auf das Schlüsselsymbol für die
Authentifizierung.
4
52
Geben Sie in das Dialogfeld Authentication Ihr Kennwort ein und klicken
Sie auf [OK].
Weitere Informationen
zum Anschluss eines
MIDI-Soundmoduls
erhalten Sie im
Benutzerhandbuch für
Ihr MIDI-Soundmodul.
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Macintosh)
5
In der Anzeige wird “Welcome to EDIROL PCR USB Driver installation”
angezeigt.
6
English
Klicken Sie auf [Continue].
In der Anzeige erscheint die Meldung “Important Message”.
Lesen Sie diese Informationen und klicken Sie auf [Continue].
7
In der Anzeige erscheint anschließend “Select the location for installation”.
8
Deutsch
Klicken Sie auf das Laufwerk, auf dem das Betriebssystem installiert ist, um
es auszuwählen, und klicken Sie anschließend auf [Continue].
In dieser Anzeige erscheint anschließend “Easy installation”.
Klicken Sie auf Install oder Upgrade.
9
In der Anzeige erscheint anschließend: “When you install this software,
you must restart your computer after the installation is complete”
(Nach Installation ist ein Neustart erforderlich)
Français
Klicken Sie anschließend auf [Continue installation].
10 In der Anzeige erscheint Folgendes: “The software was successfully
installed” (Das Programm wurde erfolgreich installiert).
Klicken Sie auf [Restart], um Ihren Computer neu zu starten.
Vorsichtsmaßnahmen bei der Verwendung des PCR
Bevor Sie Ihr Sequenzerprogramm verwenden, beachten Sie bitte Folgendes.
Italiano
* Verwenden Sie das USB-Kabel, um das PCR-30/50/80 mit Ihrem Computer zu verbinden, bevor Sie
Ihren Sequenzer oder Ihre Software starten.
* Trennen Sie das USB-Kabel nicht vom PCR-30/50/80, während Ihr Sequenzer oder andere Software
ausgeführt wird.
* Stecken Sie das USB-Kabel erst aus dem PCR-30/50/80 aus, nachdem Sie Ihren Sequenzer oder andere
Software beendet haben.
* Lassen Sie die Ruhezustandsfunktion Ihres Macintosh deaktiviert.
Español
* Das PCR-30/50/80 funktioniert nicht in der Classic-Umgebung von Mac OS X. Verwenden Sie das
PCR, wenn die Classic-Umgebung nicht ausgeführt wird.
53
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Macintosh)
■ Konfiguration des Treibers
1
Verwenden Sie das USB-Kabel, um das PCR-30/50/80 mit Ihrem
Computer zu verbinden.
1. Verbinden Sie den Wechselstromadapter mit demPCR-30/50/80 bei
AUSGESCHALTETEM Netzschalter.
2. Verbinden Sie den Wechselstromadapter mit einer elektrischen
Steckdose.
3. Verwenden Sie das USB-Kabel, um das PCR-30/50/80 mit Ihrem
Computer zu verbinden.
2
3
Bringen Sie den Netzschalter des PCR-30/50/80 in die Position ON.
Nehmen Sie in Ihrem Sequenzerprogramm die Einstellungen für
MIDI-Geräte vor. Nähere Informationen dazu, welches MIDI OUT/IN Gerät ausgewählt werden sollte, erhalten Sie unter “About the ports
when using a USB connection” (S. 159).
Nun haben Sie die Schritte ausgeführt, die erforderlich sind, um den
PCR-30/50/80 an den Macintosh anzuschließen, die MIDI-Treiber zu
installieren und die Treiber zu konfigurieren.
54
Detaillierte Informationen zu den MIDIGeräteeinstellungen
erhalten Sie im Handbuch
zu Ihrer Software.
Installation et configuration
du pilote (Windows)
■ Windows XP
1
Le PCR-30/50/80 étant débranché, démarrez Windows.
Débranchez tous les câbles USB, à l’exception de ceux du clavier et de
la souris (le cas échéant).
2
Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Propriétés Système.
1. Cliquez sur le menu Démarrer de Windows, puis, dans le menu qui
s’affiche, choisissez Panneau de configuration.
2. Dans “Choisissez une catégorie”, cliquez sur “Performances
et maintenance”.
Si vous utilisez
Windows XP Professional,
vous devez ouvrir une
session avec un nom
d’utilisateur disposant des
droits d’administrateur.
Pour plus de détails sur
les comptes utilisateur,
veuillez prendre contact
avec l’administrateur
système de votre
ordinateur.
Français
La procédure d’installation dépend de votre système d’exploitation.
Veuillez lire la section qui vous concerne.
• Windows XP.......................................................... (p. 55)
• Windows 2000....................................................... (p. 59)
• Windows Me/98 .................................................. (p. 62)
Deutsch
English
Installation du pilote
3
Cliquez sur l’onglet Matériel, puis
cliquez sur [Signature du pilote].
Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Options
de signature du pilote.
4
Vérifiez que le paramètre “Que
voulez- vous faire ?” est défini sur
“Ignorer”.
Si ce paramètre est réglé sur
“Ignorer”, cliquez sur [OK].
Si elle n’est pas définie sur “Ignorer”,
notez le paramètre indiqué (“Avertir”
ou “Bloquer”). Choisissez ensuite “Ignorer” et cliquez sur [OK].
Selon la configuration de
votre ordinateur, l’icône
Système s’affiche peutêtre dans le Panneau
de configuration (Vue
classique). Dans ce cas,
cliquez deux fois sur
l’icône Système.
Si vous avez modifié
“Que voulez-vous
faire ?” à l’étape 4, vous
devez restaurer le
réglage précédent après
installation du pilote.
55
Español
fig.2-1
Italiano
3. Dans “ou choisissez une icône du Panneau de configuration”,
cliquez sur l’icône Système.
Installation et configuration du pilote (Windows)
5
6
Cliquez sur [OK] pour fermer la boîte de dialogue Propriétés système.
Quittez tous les logiciels (applications) actifs.
Fermez également toutes les fenêtres éventuellement ouvertes. Si vous
utilisez un anti-virus, quittez-le également.
7
Munissez-vous du CD-ROM.
Introduisez-le dans le lecteur de CD de votre ordinateur.
8
Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows. Dans le menu qui s’affiche,
sélectionnez “Exécuter...”.
Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue “Exécuter...” (voir ci-dessous).
fig.2-3_30
9
Dans la boîte de dialogue qui
s’affiche, tapez ce qui suit dans
le champ “Ouvrir”, puis cliquez
sur [OK].
D:\Driver\USB_XP2K\SETUPINF.EXE
* La lettre du lecteur“D:” n’est pas forcément celle de votre ordinateur. Tapez la lettre
affectée au lecteur de CD de votre ordinateur (par exemple, E: ou F:).
10 La boîte de dialogue SetupInf s'affiche.
Vous êtes maintenant prêt à installer le pilote.
11 Utilisez le câble USB pour brancher le PCR-30/50/80 à votre ordinateur.
1. L’interrupteur d’alimentation sur OFF, branchez le cordon secteur sur
le PCR-30/50/80.
Une fois les connexions
effectuées, mettez sous
tension les différents
appareils dans l’ordre
spécifié. Ne pas respecter
cet ordre peut entraîner
des dysfonctionnements
et/ou endommager les
enceintes ou tout autre
appareil.
2. Branchez le cordon secteur sur une prise électrique (secteur).
3. Utilisez le câble USB pour brancher le PCR-30/50/80 à votre ordinateur.
12 Placez l’interrupteur d’alimentation du PCR-30/50/80 sur ON.
Près de la barre des tâches, votre ordinateur indique “Nouveau matériel
détecté”. Veuillez patienter.
56
Cet appareil est équipé
d'un circuit de protection.
Après la mise sous tension,
attendez quelques
secondes avant d'utiliser
l’appareil.
Installation et configuration du pilote (Windows)
13 La boîte de dialogue Assistant ajout de nouveau matériel s'affiche.
English
Vérifiez que l’écran indique EDIROL PCR, sélectionnez Installer à partir
d’une liste ou d’un emplacement spécifique (Avancé), puis cliquez
sur [Suivant].
fig.2-7
14 L’écran indiquera “Veuillez
choisir vos options de
recherche et d’installation”.
Deutsch
Sélectionnez “Ne pas rechercher.
Je vais choisir le pilote à
installer”, puis cliquez sur
[Suivant].
15 Vérifiez que le champ Modèle indique EDIROL PCR, puis cliquez sur
[Suivant]. L’installation du pilote commence.
Français
Si le paramètre “Que voulez-vous faire ?” n'est pas défini sur “Ignorer”, la boîte de
dialogue “Installation du matériel” s'affiche.
Si “Que voulez-vous faire ?” est définie sur “Avertir”
1.
Cliquez sur [Continuer].
2.
Poursuivez l’installation.
1.
Cliquez sur [OK].
2.
Lorsque l’“Assistant ajout de nouveau matériel” s’affiche, cliquez sur [Terminer].
3.
Procédez à l’installation comme décrit à la section “En cas de problème” (voir Device Manager
shows “?”, “!”, or “USB Composite Device” (p. 172).
Italiano
Si “Que voulez-vous faire ?” est définie sur “Bloc”
fig.2-9_30
16 La boîte de dialogue Insérez le disque s'affiche.
Cliquez sur [OK].
La boîte de dialogue
Insérez le disque ne
s'affiche pas. Dans ce cas,
17 La boîte de dialogue Fichiers nécessaires s'affiche.
Español
Tapez ce qui suit dans le champ “Copier les fichiers depuis”, puis cliquez
sur [OK].
D:\Driver\USB_XP2K
* La lettre du lecteur “D:” n’est pas forcément celle de votre ordinateur. Tapez la lettre
affectée au lecteur de CD de votre ordinateur (par exemple, E: ou F:).
57
Installation et configuration du pilote (Windows)
18 La boîte de dialogue Assistant ajout de nouveau matériel s'affiche.
Vérifiez que l’écran indique EDIROL PCR, puis cliquez sur [Terminer].
Attendez que “Nouveau matériel détecté” s’affiche près de la barre
des tâches.
19 Une fois l’installation du pilote terminée, la boîte de dialogue Modification
des paramètres système s’affiche.
Cliquez sur [Oui]. Windows redémarre automatiquement.
Si vous avez modifié “Que voulez-vous faire ?”
Si vous avez modifié “Que voulez-vous faire ?” restaurez le paramètre d’origine après
le redémarrage de Windows.
1.
Si vous utilisez Windows XP Professional, vous devez ouvrir une session avec un nom
d’utilisateur disposant des droits d’administrateur.
2. Cliquez sur le menu Démarrer de Windows, puis dans le menu qui s’affiche, choisissez
Panneau de configuration.
3. Dans “Choisissez une catégorie”, cliquez sur “Performances et maintenance”.
4.
Dans “ou choisissez une icône du Panneau de configuration”, cliquez sur l’icône
Système. La boîte de dialogue “Propriétés système” s'affiche.
* Selon la configuration de votre ordinateur, l’icône Système s’affiche peut-être dans le Panneau
de configuration (Vue classique). Dans ce cas, cliquez deux fois sur l’icône Système.
5. Cliquez sur l’onglet Matériel, puis cliquez sur [Signature du pilote]. La boîte de
dialogue Options de signature du pilote s'affiche.
6. Restaurez le paramètre “Que voulez-vous faire ?” (“Avertir” ou “Bloquer”), puis
cliquez sur [OK].
7. Cliquez sur [OK]. La boîte de dialogue Propriétés Système se ferme.
Vous devez ensuite procéder à la configuration du pilote.
(➔ Paramètres d'entrée et de sortie MIDI (p. 64))
58
Installation et configuration du pilote (Windows)
■ Windows 2000
1
Le PCR-30/50/80 étant débranché, démarrez Windows.
2
3
English
Débranchez tous les câbles USB, à l’exception de ceux du clavier et de
la souris (le cas échéant).
Ouvrez une session Windows en tant qu’utilisateur doté de droits
d’administration (Administrateur, par exemple).
Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Propriétés Système.
Deutsch
Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows, puis dans le menu qui
s’affiche, choisissez Paramètres | Panneau de configuration. Dans
Panneau de configuration, cliquez deux fois sur l'icône Système.
fig.2-12
4
Cliquez sur l’onglet Matériel, puis
cliquez sur[Signature du pilote].
Assurez-vous que l'option
“Vérification des signatures
de fichiers” est définie sur
“Ignorer”.
Si ce paramètre est réglé sur
“Ignorer”, cliquez sur [OK].
S'il n’est pas défini sur “Ignorer”,
notez le paramètre indiqué
(“Avertir” ou “Bloquer”). Choisissez ensuite “Ignorer” et cliquez sur [OK].
6
Si vous avez modifié
Vérifier la signature
des fichiers à l’étape 5,
vous devez restaurer le
réglage précédent après
installation du pilote.
Italiano
5
Français
Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue
Options de signature du pilote.
Fermez la boîte de dialogue Propriétés Système.
Cliquez sur [OK].
7
Quittez tous les logiciels (applications) actifs.
8
Español
Fermez également toutes les fenêtres éventuellement ouvertes. Si vous
utilisez un anti-virus, quittez-le également.
Munissez-vous du CD-ROM.
Introduisez-le dans le lecteur de CD de votre ordinateur.
59
Installation et configuration du pilote (Windows)
9
Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows. Dans le menu qui s’affiche,
sélectionnez “Exécuter...”.
Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue “Exécuter...” (voir ci-dessous).
fig.2-14_40
10 Dans la boîte de dialogue qui
s’affiche, tapez ce qui suit dans
le champ “Ouvrir”, puis cliquez
sur [OK].
D:\Driver\USB_XP2K\SETUPINF.EXE
* La lettre du lecteur “D:” n’est pas forcément celle de votre ordinateur. Tapez la lettre
affectée au lecteur de CD de votre ordinateur (par exemple, E: ou F:).
11 La boîte de dialogue SetupInf s'affiche.
Vous êtes maintenant prêt à installer le pilote.
12 Utilisez le câble USB pour brancher le PCR-30/50/80 à votre ordinateur.
1. L’interrupteur d’alimentation sur OFF, branchez le cordon secteur sur
le PCR-30/50/80.
Une fois les connexions
effectuées, mettez sous
tension les différents
appareils dans l’ordre
spécifié. Ne pas respecter
cet ordre peut entraîner
des dysfonctionnements
et/ou endommager les
enceintes ou tout autre
appareil.
2. Branchez le cordon secteur sur une prise électrique (secteur).
3. Utilisez le câble USB pour brancher le PCR-30/50/80 à votre ordinateur.
13 Placez l’interrupteur d’alimentation du PCR-30/50/80 sur ON.
Cet appareil est équipé
d'un circuit de protection.
Après la mise sous tension,
attendez quelques
secondes avant d'utiliser
l’appareil.
Si l’option “Vérification de la signature des pilotes” n’a pas été définie sur “Ignorer”, une boîte
de dialogue “Signature numérique introuvable” s’affiche.
Si “Vérification des signatures des fichiers” est défini sur “Avertir”
1.
Cliquez sur [Oui].
2.
Poursuivez l’installation.
Si “Vérification des signatures des fichiers” est définie sur “Bloquer”
60
1.
Cliquez sur [OK].
2.
Lorsque l’“Assistant ajout de nouveau matériel” s’affiche, cliquez sur [Terminer].
3.
Procédez à l’installation comme décrit à la section “En cas de problème” (voir Device Manager shows
“?”, “!”, or “USB Composite Device” (p. 172).
Installation et configuration du pilote (Windows)
Cliquez sur [OK].
15 La boîte de dialogue Fichiers nécessaires s'affiche.
Tapez ce qui suit dans le champ “Copier les fichiers depuis”, puis cliquez
sur [OK].
Si la boîte de dialogue
Insérez le disque ne
s’affiche pas, lisez la
section The “Insert Disk”
dialog box does not
appear (p. 171)
English
14 La boîte de dialogue Insérez le disque s'affiche.
D:\Drivers\USB_XP2K
* La lettre du lecteur “D:” n’est pas forcément celle de votre ordinateur. Tapez la lettre
affectée au lecteur de CD de votre ordinateur (par exemple, E: ou F:).
Deutsch
16 La boîte de dialogue Assistant Nouveau matériel détecté peut s'afficher.
Vérifiez que EDIROL PCR est affiché, puis cliquez sur [Terminer].
17 La boîte de dialogue Modification des paramètres système peut s'afficher.
Cliquez sur [Oui]. Windows redémarre automatiquement.
Français
Si vous avez modifié l’option “Vérification de la signature
des fichiers”
Si vous avez modifié “Vérification des signatures des fichiers”, restaurez le paramètre
original après le redémarrage de Windows.
1. Une fois Windows redémarré, ouvrez une session Windows avec des privilèges
d’administration, (par exemple, en ouvrant une session Administrateur).
2. Sur le bureau Windows, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l’icône Poste de
travail puis, dans le menu qui s’affiche, sélectionnez Propriétés. La boîte de dialogue
Propriétés Système s'affiche.
Italiano
3. Cliquez sur l’onglet Profils matériels, puis cliquez sur [Signature des pilotes].
La boîte de dialogue Options de signature du pilote s'affiche.
4. Restaurez l’option “Vérification de la signature des fichiers” à sa valeur d’origine
(“Avertir” ou “Bloquer”), puis cliquez sur [OK].
5. Cliquez sur [OK]. La boîte de dialogue Propriétés Système se ferme.
Español
Vous devez ensuite procéder à la configuration du pilote.
(➔ Paramètres d'entrée et de sortie MIDI (p. 64))
61
Installation et configuration du pilote (Windows)
■ Windows Me/98
1
Le PCR-30/50/80 étant débranché, démarrez Windows.
Débranchez tous les câbles USB, à l’exception de ceux du clavier et de
la souris (le cas échéant).
2
Quittez tous les logiciels (applications) actifs.
Fermez également toutes les fenêtres éventuellement ouvertes. Si vous
utilisez un anti-virus, quittez-le également.
3
Munissez-vous du CD-ROM.
Introduisez-le dans le lecteur de CD de votre ordinateur.
4
Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows. Dans le menu qui s’affiche,
sélectionnez “Exécuter...”.
Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue “Exécuter...” (voir ci-dessous).
fig.2-19a_30
5
Dans la boîte de dialogue qui
s’affiche, tapez ce qui suit dans
le champ “Ouvrir”, puis cliquez
sur [OK].
D:\Driver\USB_ME98\SETUPINF.EXE
* La lettre du lecteur “D:” n’est pas forcément celle de votre ordinateur. Tapez la lettre
affectée au lecteur de CD de votre ordinateur (par exemple, E: ou F:).
6
La boîte de dialogue SetupInf s'affiche.
Vous êtes maintenant prêt à installer le pilote.
62
Installation et configuration du pilote (Windows)
2. Branchez le cordon secteur sur une prise électrique (secteur).
3. Utilisez le câble USB pour brancher le PCR-30/50/80 à votre ordinateur.
Placez l’interrupteur d’alimentation du PCR-30/50/80 sur ON.
9 Le pilote s'installe automatiquement.
10 Dans la boîte de dialogue, cliquez sur [OK].
* Si un message vous recommande de relancer Windows, faites-le.
Cet appareil est équipé
d'un circuit de protection.
Après la mise sous tension,
attendez quelques
secondes avant d'utiliser
l’appareil.
Français
Vous devez ensuite procéder à la configuration du pilote.
(➔ Paramètres d'entrée et de sortie MIDI (p. 64))
Italiano
8
Une fois les connexions
effectuées, mettez sous
tension les différents
appareils dans l’ordre
spécifié. Ne pas respecter
cet ordre peut entraîner
des dysfonctionnements
et/ou endommager les
enceintes ou tout autre
appareil.
Deutsch
1. L’interrupteur d’alimentation sur OFF, branchez le cordon secteur
sur le PCR-30/50/80.
English
Utilisez le câble USB pour brancher le PCR-30/50/80 à votre ordinateur.
Español
7
63
Installation et configuration du pilote (Windows)
Paramètres
■ Paramètres d'entrée et de sortie MIDI
Windows XP/2000/Me :
1
Ouvrez le Panneau de configuration.
Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows, puis dans le menu qui s’affiche,
choisissez Paramètres | Panneau de configuration.
Windows XP
Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows, puis dans le menu qui
s’affiche, choisissez Panneau de configuration.
2
Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Propriétés sons et périphériques multimédia
(avec Windows 2000/Me, Propriétés Son et multimédia).
Windows XP
Dans “Choisissez une catégorie”, cliquez sur “Son, voix et
périphériques audio”. Dans “ou choisissez une icône du Panneau
de configuration”, cliquez sur l’icône Sons et périphériques audio.
Selon la configuration
de votre ordinateur, l’icône
Sons et périphériques
audio s’affiche peut-être
dans le Panneau de
configuration (Vue
classique). Dans ce cas,
cliquez deux fois sur
l’icône Sons et périphériques audio.
Windows 2000/Me
Dans le Panneau de configuration, cliquez deux fois sur l'icône Sons
et Multimédia pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue “Propriétés de Sons
et multimédia”.
3
Cliquez sur l'onglet Audio.
fig.2-28_30
4
Pour Lecture MIDI, cliquez sur le ▼ situé
à droite de [Périphérique par défaut]
(avec Windows 2000/Me, [Périphérique
par défaut]), puis sélectionnez un
périphérique MIDI dans la liste
qui s’affiche.
Si vous voulez utiliser Media Player
pour piloter un module de sons branché
au connecteur MIDI OUT du PCR,
sélectionnez EDIROL PCR MIDI OUT.
5
64
Fermez la boîte de dialogue Propriétés Son et périphériques multimédia.
Cliquez sur [OK] pour terminer les réglages.
Sélectionnez le périphérique MIDI approprié.
Vous n'êtes pas obligé
de sélectionner EDIROL
PCR MIDI OUT.
Pour plus de détails sur
cette connexion, reportezvous à la section “About
the ports when using a
USB connection” (p. 159)
6
Procédez aux réglages MIDI du périphérique dans votre application
(séquenceur). Pour plus de détails sur le périphérique MIDI OUT/IN
à sélectionner, reportez-vous à la section About the ports
when using a USB connection (p. 159).
Pour plus de détails sur les
réglages MIDI, reportezvous au manuel de
l'application utilisée.
Le paramétrage du pilote est terminé.
English
Installation et configuration du pilote (Windows)
Windows 98
Ouvrez le Panneau de configuration.
Deutsch
1
Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows, puis dans le menu qui
s’affiche, choisissez Paramètres | Panneau de configuration.
2
Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de Multimédia.
Dans le Panneau de configuration, cliquez deux fois sur l'icône Multimédia
pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de multimédia.
Spécifiez la sortie MIDI (MIDI output).
Sélectionnez [Single instrument], puis
sélectionnez le périphérique MIDI dans
la liste qui s'affiche.
Si vous voulez utiliser Media Player
pour piloter un module de sons
branché au connecteur MIDI OUT
du PCR, sélectionnez EDIROL
PCR MIDI OUT.
5
6
Sélectionnez le périphérique MIDI approprié.
Vous n'êtes pas obligé
de sélectionner EDIROL
PCR MIDI OUT.
Pour plus de détails sur
cette connexion, reportezvous à la section “About
the ports when using a
USB connection” (p. 159).
Italiano
Cliquez sur l'onglet MIDI.
Fermez la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de Multimédia.
Cliquez sur [OK] pour terminer les réglages.
Procédez aux réglages MIDI du périphérique dans votre application
(séquenceur). Pour plus de détails sur le périphérique MIDI OUT/IN
à sélectionner, reportez-vous à la section “About the ports when using
a USB connection” (p. 159).
Pour plus de détails sur les
réglages MIDI, reportezvous au manuel de
l'application utilisée.
Le paramétrage du pilote est terminé.
65
Español
3
4
Français
fig.2-29_30
Installation et configuration
du pilote (Macintosh)
The installation procedure will differ depending on your system.
Please proceed to one of the following sections, depending on the system you use.
• Mac OS 9/8 users ................................................. (p. 66)
• Mac OS X users ..................................................... (p. 71)
Utilisateurs Mac OS 9/8
■ Installation du pilote
Utilisation d’OMS ou de FreeMIDI comme pilote MIDI.
Le pilote PCR-30/50/80 est un module supplémentaire fourni pour pouvoir
faire fonctionner le PCR-30/50/80 avec OMS ou FreeMIDI.
* OMS ou FreeMIDI doit être installé sur votre Macintosh, selon le logiciel
séquenceur utilisé.
Procédez comme suit pour installer le pilote PCR-30/50/80.
OMS se trouve dans
le dossier OMS 2.3.8 E
du dossier OMS sur
le CD-ROM. Pour plus
d'information sur OMS,
veuillez lire le document
OMS_2.3_Mac.pdf
(manuel au format
Acrobat) situé dans
le dossier OMS Driver
du dossier OMS sur
le CD-ROM.
* Débranchez l'PCR-30/50/80 du Macintosh avant d'effectuer l'installation.
Si le PCR-30/50/80 est allumé, un message similaire à celui présenté ici s'affiche à la mise sous
tension du Macintosh. Suivez une des procédures décrites ci-après, selon le message qui s'affiche.
Si l'écran affiche :
“Driver required for USB device ‘unknown device’ is not available. Search for
driver on the Internet?” ➔ Cliquez sur [Cancel].
Si l'écran affiche :
“Software required for using device ‘unknown device’ cannot be found. Please
refer to the manual included with the device, and install the necessary software”
➔ Cliquez sur [OK].
66
Installation et configuration du pilote (Macintosh)
1
Quittez tous les logiciels (applications) actifs.
Si vous utilisez un anti-virus, quittez-le également.
Munissez-vous du CD-ROM.
English
2
Insérez le CD-ROM dans le lecteur de CD-ROM.
3
4
Cliquez deux fois sur l'icône PCR Driver-E Installer (dans le dossier Driver
E (Mac OS 9, 8) - OMS du CD-ROM) pour lancer l'installeur.
Vérifiez l’emplacement de l’installation et cliquez sur [Install].
5
Deutsch
fig.3-2_40
Si un message du type suivant
s’affiche, cliquez sur [Continuer].
Les autres applications actives se
ferment et l’installation continue.
6
Une boîte de dialogue s’affiche : Installation completed.
Français
Cliquez sur [Redémarrer] pour redémarrer le Macintosh.
■ Paramètres
1
Utilisez le câble USB pour relier le PCR-30/50/80 à votre ordinateur.
1. L’interrupteur d’alimentation sur OFF, branchez le cordon secteur
sur le PCR-30/50/80.
2. Branchez le cordon secteur sur une prise électrique (secteur).
3. Utilisez le câble USB pour relier le PCR-30/50/80 à votre ordinateur.
2
Une fois les connexions
effectuées, mettez sous
tension les différents
appareils dans l’ordre
spécifié. Ne pas respecter
cet ordre peut entraîner
des dysfonctionnements
et/ou endommager les
haut-parleurs ou tout autre
appareil.
Italiano
Paramètres OMS
Placez l’interrupteur d’alimentation du PCR-30/50/80 sur ON.
3
Depuis le CD-ROM, faites glisser le dossier
Driver E (Mac OS 9, 8) - OMS Setting vers le disque dur
du Macintosh pour le copier.
Baissez toujours le volume
avant la mise sous tension.
Même avec le volume
à zéro, il se peut que vous
entendiez des sons lors de
la mise sous tension, mais
cela ne signifie rien
d'anormal.
67
Español
fig.3-3
fig.3-3
Installation et configuration du pilote (Macintosh)
fig.3-4
4
Dans le dossier Opcode-OMS Application où vous
avez installé OMS, cliquez deux fois sur OMS Setup
pour le lancer.
fig.3-5_35
5
Si une boîte de dialogue similaire à
celle présentée ici s'affiche, cliquez
sur [Turn It Off]. Une boîte de
confirmation s'affiche, cliquez
sur [OK].
fig.3-6_35
6
La boîte de dialogue Create a New
Studio setup s'affiche. Cliquez
sur [Annuler].
Si vous avez cliqué sur [OK]
par erreur, cliquez sur [Annuler]
dans la boîte suivante.
fig.3-7
fig.3-8_35
7
Choisissez “Open” dans le
menu File.
Dans le dossier Setting que vous
avez copié à l'étape 3, sélectionnez
le fichier PCR, puis cliquez
sur [Open].
Un écran similaire à celui
présenté ici s'affiche.
fig.3-9_35
8
Dans le menu Edit, sélectionnez
OMS MIDI Setup.
Dans la boîte de dialogue
OMS MIDI Setup qui s'affiche,
sélectionnez Run MIDI in
background (Lancer MIDI
en tâche de fond), puis
cliquez sur [OK].
68
Nous vous reommandons
de désactiver AppleTalk,
en activant le Sélecteur
dans le menu Apple.
Installation et configuration du pilote (Macintosh)
fig.3-10
9
Dans le menu File, sélectionnez
Make Current (Rendre actif).
A diamond mark (◊) indicate in the settings are enabled.
English
Si vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner
Make Current, cela signifie qu'il
est déjà activé et que vous pouvez
passer à l'étape suivante.
Deutsch
10 Vérifiez que l'envoi et la réception MIDI fonctionnent correctement. Dans
le menu Studio, sélectionnez Make Current (Rendre actif).
fig.3-22_50
PCR-30/50/80. Si la flèche à côté
du numéro 2 ou 3 sur le schéma
de droite clignote, les réglages
sont corrects.
Pour plus d'informations
sur la connexion d'un
module de sons MIDI,
reportez-vous à la
documentation de votre
module de sons MIDI.
Italiano
Lorsque vous déplacez le curseur
de la souris sur l'icône représentant
une prise MIDI, le curseur se
transforme en note de musique.
Si un module de sons est branché en
sortie MIDI OUT du PCR-30/50/80, cliquer sur l'icône de prise MIDI
du schéma de droite produira un son: les réglages sont alors corrects.
Français
11 Pressez une touche du clavier du
12 Quittez OMS Setup.
Dans le menu File, choisissez [Exit]. Si la boîte de dialogue AppleTalk
confirmation s'affiche, cliquez sur [OK] pour la fermer.
Español
La connexion du PCR-30/50/80 au Macintosh, l’installation du pilote MIDI
ainsi que sa configuration sont terminées.
69
Installation et configuration du pilote (Macintosh)
Paramètres FreeMIDI
1
Utilisez le câble USB pour relier le PCR-30/50/80 à votre ordinateur.
1. L’interrupteur d’alimentation sur OFF, branchez le cordon secteur
sur le PCR-30/50/80.
2. Branchez le cordon secteur sur une prise électrique (secteur).
3. Utilisez le câble USB pour relier le PCR-30/50/80 à votre ordinateur.
2
3
4
5
6
Placez l’interrupteur d’alimentation du PCR-30/50/80 sur ON.
Depuis le CD-ROM, copiez le dossier Driver E (Mac OS 9, 8) – FreeMIDI
Setting sur le disque dur du Macintosh.
Ouvrez le dossier FreeMIDI Applications à l'emplacement où vous avez
installé FreeMIDI, puis cliquez deux fois sur l'icône FreeMIDI Setup pour
démarrer la configuration.
Quand le message suivant apparaît : “OMS is installed on this
computer...”, cliquez sur [FreeMIDI].
Au premier lancement de FreeMIDI, une boîte de dialogue “Welcome
to FreeMIDI!” s’affiche. Cliquez sur [Continue].
7 Quand la boîte de dialogue FreeMIDI Preferences s'affiche, cliquez sur [Cancel].
8 Quand la boîte de dialogue About Quick Setup s'affiche, cliquez sur [Cancel].
9 Dans le menu File, sélectionnez Open.
10 Sélectionnez PCR dans le dossier FreeMIDI Settings que vous avez copié
à l’étape 3, puis cliquez sur [Open].
11 Vérifiez que l'envoi et la réception MIDI fonctionnent correctement.
Dans le menu MIDI, choisissez Check Connections.
70
Une fois les connexions
effectuées, mettez sous
tension les différents
appareils dans l’ordre
spécifié. Ne pas respecter
cet ordre peut entraîner
des dysfonctionnements
et/ou endommager les
haut-parleurs ou tout
autre appareil.
Baissez toujours le volume
avant la mise sous tension.
Même avec le volume à
zéro, il se peut que vous
entendiez des sons lors
de la mise sous tension,
mais cela ne signifie
rien d'anormal.
Installation et configuration du pilote (Macintosh)
fig.3-13_40
en sortie MIDI OUT du PCR-30/
50/80, cliquer sur l'icône de prise
MIDI du schéma de droite
produira un son: les réglages
sont alors corrects.
Pour plus d'informations
sur la connexion d'un
module de sons MIDI,
reportez-vous à la
documentation de votre
module de sons MIDI.
Deutsch
13 Choisissez à nouveau la commande MIDI Check Connections pour
English
12 Si un module de sons est branché
terminer le test.
14 Dans le menu File, choisissez Quit pour quitter FreeMIDI Setup.
Français
La connexion du PCR-30/50/80 au Macintosh, l’installation du pilote MIDI
ainsi que sa configuration sont terminées.
Utilisateurs Mac OS X
■ Installation du pilote
2
Déconnectez tous les câbles USB à l’exception de ceux de votre clavier et de
votre souris, et redémarrez votre Macintosh.
Italiano
1
Munissez-vous du CD-ROM.
Introduisez-le dans le lecteur de CD de votre ordinateur.
3
Dans le dossier Driver (Mac OS X) du CD-ROM, cliquez deux fois sur
PCRUSBDriver.pkg.
4
Español
Dans Mac OS X v10.1.5, cliquez sur le symbole du verrou pour vous
identifier.
Dans la boîte de dialogue d'identification, entrez le mot de passe et cliquez
sur [OK].
71
Installation et configuration du pilote (Macintosh)
5
L’indication “Welcome to the EDIROL PCR USB Driver Installation”
s'affiche.
Cliquez sur [Continue].
6
“Important message” s'affiche.
Lisez les informations, puis cliquez sur [Continue].
7
“Select the location for installation” s’affiche.
Cliquez sur le lecteur dans lequel le système est installé pour le sélectionner,
puis cliquez sur [Continue].
8
“Easy Installation” s'affiche.
Cliquez sur [Install] ou sur [Upgrade].
9
Le message “When you install this software, you must restart your
computer after the installation is complete” s’affiche (“Vous devez
redémarrer votre ordinateur une fois l’installation terminée”).
Cliquez sur [Continue installation].
10 “The software was successfully installed” s'affiche (“Le logiciel a été
installé avec succès”).
Cliquez sur [Restart] pour redémarrer votre ordinateur.
Précautions à prendre lors de l’utilisation de PCR
Avant d’utiliser votre logiciel séquenceur, tenez compte des
points suivants.
* Branchez le PCR-30/50/80 à votre ordinateur avec un câble USB avant de lancer tout
logiciel audio.
* Ne débranchez pas le câble USB du PCR-30/50/80 pendant que le logiciel est actif.
* Débranchez le câble USB du PCR-30/50/80 uniquement après avoir quitté votre logiciel.
* Laissez la fonction Veille de votre Macintosh désactivée.
* Le PCR-30/50/80 ne fonctionne pas dans l’environnement Classic de Mac OS X. Utilisez
le PCR lorsque cet environnement est inactif.
72
Installation et configuration du pilote (Macintosh)
■ Réglage du pilote
Utilisez le câble USB pour brancher le PCR-30/50/80 à votre ordinateur.
English
1. L’interrupteur d’alimentation sur OFF, branchez le cordon secteur sur
le PCR-30/50/80.
2. Branchez le cordon secteur sur une prise électrique (secteur).
3. Utilisez le câble USB pour brancher le PCR-30/50/80 à votre
ordinateur.
Placez l’interrupteur d’alimentation du PCR-30/50/80 sur ON.
Procédez aux réglages MIDI du périphérique dans votre séquenceur logiciel.
Pour plus de détails sur le périphérique MIDI OUT/IN à sélectionner,
reportez-vous à la section “About the ports when using a USB
connection” (p. 159).
Pour plus de détails
sur les réglages MIDI,
reportez-vous au manuel
de l'application utilisée.
Italiano
Français
La connexion du PCR-30/50/80 au Macintosh, l’installation du pilote MIDI
ainsi que sa configuration sont terminées.
Español
2
3
Deutsch
1
73
Installazione e configurazione
del driver (Windows)
Installazione del driver
La procedura d’installazione dipenderà dal sistema utilizzato.
Passare ad una delle sezioni seguenti a seconda del sistema utilizzato.
• Utenti Windows XP ............................................. (pag. 74)
• Utenti Windows 2000........................................... (pag. 78)
• Utenti Windows Me/98 ...................................... (pag. 81)
■ Utenti Windows XP
1
Dopo aver scollegato il PCR-30/50/80 , avviare Windows.
Scollegare tutti i cavi USB, ad eccezione della tastiera e del mouse USB,
se utilizzati.
2
Aprire la finestra di dialogo Proprietà del sistema.
1. In Windows, fare clic sul pulsante Start e nel menu selezionare
Pannello di controllo.
2. In “Scegliere una categoria”, fare clic su “Prestazioni e manutenzione”.
Se si utilizza Windows XP
Professional, è necessario
collegarsi come un nome
utente dotato di privilegi
amministrativi, ad
esempio come Administrator. Per maggiori informazioni sugli account
degli utenti, contattare
l’amministratore del
sistema.
3. In “o un’icona del Pannello di controllo”, fare clic sull’icona Sistema.
fig.2-1
3
Fare clic sulla scheda Hardware
e poi sul pulsante [Firma driver].
Aprire la finestra di dialogo
Opzioni firma driver.
4
Accertarsi che “Scegliere una
delle seguenti opzioni” sia
impostato su “Ignora”
Se è attivata l’opzione “Ignora”
fare clic su [OK].
Se non è impostata su “Ignora”
prendere nota dell’impostazione
corrente (di avviso o di blocco).
Modificare quindi l’impostazione
su “Ignora” e fare clic su [OK]
74
A seconda di come il
sistema è configurato,
l’icona Sistema potrebbe
essere visualizzata
direttamente nel Pannello
di controllo (visualizzazione classica). In tal caso
fare doppio clic sull'icona
Sistema.
Se al passo 4 il parametro
“Scegliere una delle
seguenti impostazioni”
è stato modificato, dopo
aver installato il driver
è necessario ripristinare
l’impostazione d’origine.
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Windows)
5
6
Fare clic su [OK] per chiudere la finestra di dialogo Proprietà del sistema.
English
Chiudere tutti i programmi in corso di esecuzione.
Chiudere anche le altre finestre aperte. Se si utilizza un programma antivirus
o simile, accertarsi che sia anch’esso chiuso.
7
Preparare il CD-ROM.
Inserire il CD nell’unità CD-ROM del computer.
8
Deutsch
Fare clic sul pulsante Start di Windows. Nel menu visualizzato, selezionare
“Esegui”.
Aprire la finestra di dialogo “Esegui...”.
fig.2-3_30
Nella finestra di dialogo che
appare, immettere quanto segue
nel campo “Apri” e fare clic
su [OK].
Français
9
D:\Driver\USB_XP2K\SETUPINF.EXE
10 Appare la finestra di dialogo SetupInf.
È ora possibile installare il driver.
11 Utilizzare il cavo USB per collegare il PCR-30/50/80 al computer.
1. Dopo aver spostato l’interruttore di alimentazione su OFF, collegare
l’adattatore AC al PCR-30/50/80.
Una volta terminati
i collegamenti, accendere
i vari dispositivi nell’ordine
indicato. Se i dispositivi
vengono accesi nell’ordine
sbagliato, si rischia di
provocare malfunzionamenti e/o danni ai
diffusori e agli altri
dispositivi.
Italiano
* L’identificativo dell’unità “D:” potrebbe essere diverso da quello del sistema
utilizzato. In questo caso specificare il nome dell’unità CD-ROM utilizzata.
2. Collegare l’adattatore AC a una presa elettrica.
12 Spostare l’interruttore di alimentazione del PCR-30/50/80 in posizione ON.
Nella barra delle applicazioni verrà visualizzato il messaggio “Trovato
nuovo hardware”. Attendere qualche minuto.
Questo apparecchio
è provvisto di un circuito
di protezione. È necessario
aspettare qualche secondo
dopo l’accensione prima
che l’apparecchio funzioni
normalmente.
75
Español
3. Utilizzare il cavo USB per collegare il PCR-30/50/80 al computer.
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Windows)
13 Verrà visualizzata la finestra di dialogo Installazione guidata nuovo
hardware.
Accertarsi che sullo schermo compaia “EDIROL PCR”, selezionare
“Installa da un elenco o percorso specifico (per utenti esperti)”
e fare clic su [Avanti].
fig.2-7
14 La finestra visualizzerà il
seguente messaggio
“Selezionare le opzioni di
ricerca e di installazione”.
Selezionare “Non effettuare
la ricerca. La scelta del driver
da installare verrà effettuata
manualmente”, e fare clic
su [Avanti].
15 Accertarsi che il campo “Modello” visualizzi “EDIROL PCR” e fare clic
su [Avanti]. La procedura di installazione del driver verrà avviata.
Se l’impostazione “Scegliere una delle seguenti opzioni” non è stata impostata su
“Ignora” comparirà il messaggio “Installazione guidata hardware”.
Se “Scegliere una delle seguenti opzioni” è impostato su “Avvisa”
1.
Fare clic su [Continuare].
2.
Continuare l’installazione.
Se “Scegliere una delle seguenti opzioni” è impostato su “Blocca”
1.
Fare clic su [OK].
2.
Quando appare la finestra “Installazione guidata nuovo hardware”, fare clic su [Fine].
3.
Eseguire l’installazione come descritto nella sezione “Troubleshooting”, Device Manager
shows “?”, “!”, or “USB Composite Device” (pag. 172).
fig.2-9_30
16 Viene visualizzata la finestra di dialogo Inserisci disco
Fare clic su [OK].
17 Viene visualizzata la finestra di dialogo Richiesta file
Immettere quanto segue nel campo “Copia file da” e fare clic su [OK].
D:\Driver\USB_XP2K
* L’identificativo dell’unità “D:” potrebbe essere diverso da quello del sistema
utilizzato. In questo caso specificare il nome dell’unità CD-ROM utilizzata.
76
Viene visualizzata la
finestra di dialogo Inserire
il disco. In questo caso
passare al passo 17.
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Windows)
18 Verrà visualizzata la finestra di dialogo Installazione guidata nuovo
hardware.
English
Accertarsi che sullo schermo sia visualizzato “EDIROL PCR”, e fare clic
su [Fine].
Attendere fino a quando nella barra delle applicazioni non appare il
messaggio “Trovato nuovo hardware”.
19 Alla fine dell’installazione del driver, comparirà la finestra di dialogo
Modifica impostazioni di sistema.
Fare clic su [Sì]. Windows verrà riavviato automaticamente.
Deutsch
Se è stato modificato il parametro “Scegliere una delle seguenti opzioni”
Se l’impostazione Scegliere una delle seguenti opzioni è stata modificata, ripristinare
il parametro d’origine dopo aver riavviato Windows.
1.
Se si utilizza Windows XP Professional, collegarsi con un nome utente dotato
di privilegi di tipo amministrativo (ad esempio Administrator).
2. In Windows, fare clic sul menu Start e nel menu selezionare Pannello di controllo.
3. In “Scegliere una categoria”, fare clic su “Prestazioni e manutenzione”.
In “o un’icona del Pannello di controllo”, fare clic sull’icona Sistema. Viene
visualizzata la finestra di dialogo Proprietà del sistema.
Français
4.
* A seconda di come il sistema è configurato, l’icona Sistema potrebbe essere visualizzata direttamente
nel Pannello di controllo (visualizzazione classica). In tal caso fare doppio clic sull'icona Sistema.
5. Fare clic sulla scheda Hardware e poi sul pulsante [Firma driver]. Verrà visualizzata
la finestra di dialogo Opzioni firma driver.
6. Ripristinare l’impostazione Scegliere una delle seguenti opzioni al valore d’origine
(di avviso o di blocco) e fare clic su [OK].
Italiano
7. Fare clic su [OK]. La finestra di dialogo Proprietà di sistema si chiude.
Español
Successivamente sarà necessario configurare il driver.
(➔ Destinazioni input e output MIDI (pag. 83))
77
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Windows)
■ Utenti Windows 2000
1
Dopo aver scollegato il PCR-30/50/80 , avviare Windows.
Scollegare tutti i cavi USB, ad eccezione della tastiera e del mouse USB,
se utilizzati.
2
3
Collegarsi a Windows con i privilegi di un amministratore, ad esempio
come Administrator.
Aprire la finestra di dialogo Proprietà del sistema.
In Windows, fare clic sul pulsante Start e nel menu selezionare Impostazioni
| Pannello di controllo. Nel Pannello di controllo, fare doppio clic
sull'icona Sistema.
fig.2-12
4
Fare clic sulla scheda Hardware
e poi sul pulsante [Firma driver].
Aprire la finestra di dialogo
Opzioni firma driver.
5
Accertarsi che “Verifica firma
file” sia impostato su “Ignora”.
Se è attivata l’opzione “Ignora”
fare clic su [OK].
Se non è impostata su “Ignora”
prendere nota dell’impostazione
corrente (di avviso o di blocco).
Modificare quindi l’impostazione
su “Ignora” e fare clic su [OK]
6
Chiudere la finestra di dialogo Proprietà del sistema.
Fare clic su [OK].
7
Chiudere tutti i programmi in corso di esecuzione.
Chiudere anche le altre finestre aperte. Se si utilizza un programma antivirus
o simile, accertarsi che sia anch’esso chiuso.
8
Preparare il CD-ROM.
Inserire il CD nell’unità CD-ROM del computer.
78
Se “Verifica firma file”
è stato modificato al
passo 5, si dovrà
ripristinare l’impostazione d’origine dopo
aver installato il driver.
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Windows)
9
Fare clic sul pulsante Start di Windows. Nel menu visualizzato,
selezionare “Esegui”.
Aprire la finestra di dialogo “Esegui...”.
appare, immettere quanto segue
nel campo “Apri” e fare clic
su [OK].
D:\Driver\USB_XP2K\SETUPINF.EXE
* L’identificativo dell’unità “D:” potrebbe essere diverso da quello del sistema
utilizzato. In questo caso specificare il nome dell’unità CD-ROM utilizzata.
11 Appare la finestra di dialogo SetupInf.
È ora possibile installare il driver.
12 Utilizzare il cavo USB per collegare il PCR-30/50/80 al computer.
1. Dopo aver spostato l’interruttore di alimentazione su OFF, collegare
l’adattatore AC al PCR-30/50/80.
Una volta terminati
i collegamenti, accendere
i vari dispositivi nell’ordine
indicato. Se i dispositivi
vengono accesi nell’ordine
sbagliato, si rischia di
provocare malfunzionamenti e/o danni ai
diffusori e agli altri
dispositivi.
Français
10 Nella finestra di dialogo che
Deutsch
English
fig.2-14_40
3. Utilizzare il cavo USB per collegare il PCR-30/50/80 al computer.
13 Spostare l’interruttore di alimentazione del PCR-30/50/80 in posizione ON.
Questo apparecchio
è provvisto di un circuito
di protezione. È necessario
aspettare qualche secondo
dopo l’accensione prima
che l’apparecchio funzioni
normalmente.
Italiano
2. Collegare l’adattatore AC a una presa elettrica.
Se l’impostazione “Verifica firma file” non è stata impostata su “Ignora”, verrà visualizzato
il messaggio “Firma digitale non trovata”.
1.
Fare clic su [Sì].
2.
Continuare l’installazione.
Español
Se “Verifica firma digitale” è “impostato su Avvisa”,
Se “Verifica firma digitale” è “impostato su Blocca”,
1.
Fare clic su [OK].
2.
Quando appare la finestra “Installazione guidata nuovo hardware”, fare clic su [Fine].
3.
Eseguire l’installazione come descritto nella sezione “Troubleshooting”, Device Manager
shows “?”, “!”, or “USB Composite Device” (pag. 172).
79
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Windows)
14 Viene visualizzata la finestra di dialogo Inserisci disco
Fare clic su [OK].
15 Viene visualizzata la finestra di dialogo Richiesta file
Immettere quanto segue nel campo “Copia file da” e fare clic su [OK].
Se la finestra di dialogo
Inserire il disco non
appare, leggere la sezione
The “Insert Disk” dialog
box does not appear
(pag. 171).
D:\Drivers\USB_XP2K
* L’identificativo dell’unità “D:” potrebbe essere diverso da quello del sistema
utilizzato. In questo caso specificare il nome dell’unità CD-ROM utilizzata.
16 Potrebbe essere visualizzata la finestra di dialogo “Installazione guidata
nuovo hardware”.
Accertarsi che “EDIROL PCR” sia visualizzato e fare clic su [Fine].
17 Viene visualizzata la finestra di dialogo Modifica impostazioni di sistema.
Fare clic su [Sì]. Windows verrà riavviato automaticamente.
Se è stata modificata l’impostazione “Verifica firma file”
Se l’impostazione “Verifica firma file” è stata cambiata, ripristinare l’impostazione d’origine
dopo aver riavviato Windows.
1. Dopo aver riavviato Windows, collegarsi a Windows come un utente dotato
di privilegi di amministrazione, ad esempio come Administrator.
2. Sul desktop di Windows, fare clic con il pulsante destro del mouse su Risorse del
computer e nel menu visualizzato selezionare Proprietà. Viene visualizzata la finestra
di dialogo Proprietà del sistema.
3. Fare clic sulla scheda Hardware e poi sul pulsante [Firma driver]. Verrà visualizzata
la finestra di dialogo Opzioni firma driver.
4. Ripristinare l’impostazione “Verifica firma file” al valore d’origine(“Avvisa” o “Blocca”),
e fare clic su [OK].
5. Fare clic su [OK]. La finestra di dialogo Proprietà di sistema si chiude.
Successivamente sarà necessario configurare il driver.)
(➔ Destinazioni input e output MIDI (pag. 83))
80
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Windows)
■ Utenti Windows Me/98
1
Dopo aver scollegato il PCR-30/50/80 , avviare Windows.
2
English
Scollegare tutti i cavi USB, ad eccezione della tastiera e del mouse USB,
se utilizzati.
Chiudere tutti i programmi in corso di esecuzione.
Chiudere anche le altre finestre aperte. Se si utilizza un programma antivirus
o simile, accertarsi che sia anch’esso chiuso.
3
Preparare il CD-ROM.
4
Deutsch
Inserire il CD nell’unità CD-ROM del computer.
Fare clic sul pulsante Start di Windows. Nel menu visualizzato, selezionare
“Esegui”.
Aprire la finestra di dialogo “Esegui...”.
fig.2-19a_30
Nella finestra di dialogo che
appare, immettere quanto
segue nel campo “Apri” e fare
clic su [OK].
Français
5
D:\Driver\USB_ME98\SETUPINF.EXE
Appare la finestra di dialogo SetupInf.
È ora possibile installare il driver.
Español
6
Italiano
* L’identificativo dell’unità “D:” potrebbe essere diverso da quello del sistema
utilizzato. In questo caso specificare il nome dell’unità CD-ROM utilizzata.
81
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Windows)
7
Utilizzare il cavo USB per collegare il PCR-30/50/80 al computer.
1. Dopo aver spostato l’interruttore di alimentazione su OFF, collegare
l’adattatore AC al PCR-30/50/80.
2. Collegare l’adattatore AC a una presa elettrica.
3. Utilizzare il cavo USB per collegare il PCR-30/50/80 al computer.
8
Spostare l’interruttore di alimentazione del PCR-30/50/80 in posizione ON.
9 Il driver verrà installato automaticamente.
10 Nella finestra di dialogo, fare clic su [OK].
* Se appare un messaggio che invita a riavviare Windows, riavviarlo come consigliato.
Successivamente sarà necessario configurare il driver.
(➔ Destinazioni input e output MIDI (pag. 83))
82
Una volta terminati
i collegamenti, accendere
i vari dispositivi nell’ordine
indicato. Se i dispositivi
vengono accesi nell’ordine
sbagliato, si rischia di
provocare malfunzionamenti e/o danni ai diffusori
e agli altri dispositivi.
Questo apparecchio
è provvisto di un circuito
di protezione. È necessario
aspettare qualche secondo
dopo l’accensione prima
che l’apparecchio funzioni
normalmente.
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Windows)
Impostazioni
■ Destinazioni input e output MIDI
Aprire il Pannello di controllo.
In Windows, fare clic sul pulsante Start e nel menu selezionare Impostazioni
| Pannello di controllo.
2
Aprire la finestra di dialogo Proprietà – Suoni e periferiche audio (oppure
in Windows 2000/Me, Proprietà – Suoni e multimedia ).
Windows XP
In “Scegliere una categoria”, fare clic su “Suoni, voce e periferiche
audio”. Successivamente in “o un’icona del Pannello di controllo”, fare
clic sull’icona Suoni e periferiche audio.
Windows 2000/Me
Nel Pannello di controllo, fare doppio clic sull’icona Suoni e
multimedia per aprire la finestra “Proprietà suoni e multimedia”.
3
A seconda di come
il sistema è configurato,
l’icona Suoni e periferiche audio potrebbe
essere visualizzata direttamente nel Pannello di
controllo (visualizzazione
classica). In tal caso fare
doppio clic sull'icona
Suoni e periferiche
audio.
Français
Windows XP
In Windows, fare clic sul pulsante Start e nel menu selezionare Pannello
di controllo.
Deutsch
1
English
Utenti Windows XP/2000/Me
Fare clic sulla scheda Audio.
Per Riproduzione musica MIDI, fare clic
su ▼ a destra di [Periferica predefinita]
(oppure in Windows 2000/Me,
[Periferica preferenziale]) e selezionare
la periferica MIDI nell’elenco
visualizzato.
Per utilizzare Windows Media Player per
riprodurre un modulo sonoro collegato
al connettore MIDI OUT del PCR,
selezionare EDIROL PCR MIDI OUT.
5
Per maggiori informazioni sulla porta, fare
riferimento alla sezione.
“About the ports
when using a USB
connection” (pag. 159).
Chiudere la finestra di dialogo Proprietà – Suoni e periferiche audio.
Fare clic su OK per completare le impostazioni.
83
Español
4
Selezionare la periferica
MIDI opportuna per il
sistema utilizzato. Non
è necessario selezionare
obbligatoriamente
EDIROL PCR MIDI OUT.
Italiano
fig.2-28_30
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Windows)
6
Configurare la periferica MIDI sul sofware sequencer. Per maggiori
informazioni sulla periferica MIDI OUT/IN da selezionare, fare riferimento
alla sezione About the ports when using a USB connection (pag. 159).
La procedura di configurazione del driver è giunta al termine.
Per maggiori informazioni
sulle impostazioni della
periferica MIDI, fare
riferimento al manuale
del software utilizzato.
Utenti Windows 98
1
Aprire il Pannello di controllo.
In Windows, fare clic sul pulsante Start e nel menu selezionare Impostazioni
| Pannello di controllo.
2
Aprire la finestra di dialogo Proprietà multimediali.
Nel Pannello di controllo, fare doppio clic sull’icona Multimedia per aprire
la finestra Proprietà multimediali.
fig.2-29_30
3
4
Fare clic sulla scheda MIDI.
Impostare l’“Uscita MIDI”.
Selezionare [Strumento singolo]
e scegliere la periferica MIDI
nell’elenco visualizzato.
Per utilizzare Windows Media Player
per riprodurre un modulo sonoro
collegato al connettore MIDI OUT
del PCR, selezionare EDIROL
PCR MIDI OUT.
5
6
Chiudere la finestra di dialogo Proprietà multimediali.
Fare clic su OK per completare le impostazioni.
Configurare la periferica MIDI sul sofware sequencer. Per maggiori
informazioni sulla periferica MIDI OUT/IN da selezionare, fare riferimento
alla sezione “About the ports when using a USB connection” (pag. 159).
La procedura di configurazione del driver è giunta al termine.
84
Selezionare la periferica
MIDI opportuna per il
sistema utilizzato. Non
è necessario selezionare
obbligatoriamente
EDIROL PCR MIDI OUT.
Per maggiori informazioni sulla porta, fare
riferimento alla sezione
“About the ports
when using a USB
connection” (pag. 159).
Per maggiori informazioni
sulle impostazioni della
periferica MIDI, fare
riferimento al manuale
del software utilizzato.
English
Installazione e configurazione
del driver (Macintosh)
The installation procedure will differ depending on your system.
Please proceed to one of the following sections, depending on the system you use.
• Mac OS 9/8 users ................................................. (pag. 85)
• Mac OS X users ..................................................... (pag. 91)
■ Installazione del driver
Utilizzare come driver MIDI OMS o FreeMIDI.
Il driver PCR-30/50/80 è un modulo aggiuntivo che permette di utilizzare
l’SD-80 con OM0 o FreeMIDI.
* Sul Macintosh deve essere stato installato OMS o FreeMIDI a seconda del software
sequencer utilizzato.
Seguire la procedura sotto indicata per installare il driver PCR-30/50/80.
L’applicazione OMS si
trova nella cartella OMS
2.3.8 E all’interno della
cartella OMS del CD-ROM.
Per avere maggiori
informazioni sul software
OMS, consultare il file
OMS_2.3_Mac.pdf
(manuale in linea) che si
trova nella cartella OMS
2.3.8E all’interno della
cartella OMS sul CD-ROM.
Français
Deutsch
Utenti Mac OS 9/8
* Scollegare l’PCR-30/50/80 dal Macintosh prima di eseguire l’installazione
Italiano
Se l’PCR-30/50/80 è acceso, comparirà un messaggio, come quello sotto illustrato, quando
viene avviato il Macintosh. Seguire una delle procedure sotto indicate a seconda del
messaggio visualizzato.
Se appare il seguente messaggio:
“Driver required for USB device ‘unknown device’ is not available. Search for driver on
the Internet?”
➔ fare clic su [Cancel].
Español
Se appare il seguente messaggio:
“Software required for using device ‘unknown device’ cannot be found. Please refer to
the manual included with the device, and install the necessary software”
➔ fare clic su [OK].
85
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Macintosh)
1
Chiudere tutti i programmi in corso di esecuzione.
Se si utilizza un programma antivirus o simili, accertarsi che sia
anch’esso chiuso.
2
Preparare il CD-ROM.
Inserire il CD-ROM nell’unità CD-ROM.
3
4
Fare doppio clic sull’icona PCR Driver-E Installer, che si trova nella cartella
Driver E (Mac OS 9, 8) del CD-ROM, per avviare il programma
d’installazione.
Controllare la destinazione dell'installazione e fare clic su [Install].
fig.3-2_40
5
Se appare un messaggio come
quello sotto indicato, fare clic
su [Continue].
Le applicazioni in corso di
esecuzione verranno chiuse
e l’installazione proseguirà.
6
Verrà visualizzata una finestra di dialogo indicante Installation completed.
Fare clic su [Restart] per riavviare il Macintosh.
■ Impostazioni
Impostazioni OMS
1
Utilizzare il cavo USB per collegare l’PCR-30/50/80 al computer.
1. Dopo aver spostato l’interruttore di alimentazione su OFF, collegare
il adattatore AC all’PCR-30/50/80.
2. Collegare il adattatore AC a una presa elettrica.
3. Utilizzare il cavo USB per collegare l’PCR-30/50/80 al computer.
86
Una volta terminati
i collegamenti, accendere
i vari dispositivi nell’ordine
indicato. Se i dispositivi
vengono accesi nell’ordine
sbagliato, si rischia di
provocare malfunzionamenti e/o danni ai
diffusori e agli altri
dispositivi.
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Macintosh)
2
Spostare l’interruttore di alimentazione dell’PCR-30/50/80 in posizione ON.
Dal CD-ROM, selezionare e trascinare la cartella
Driver E (Mac OS 9, 8) - OMS Setting sul disco fisso del
Macintosh per copiarvela.
fig.3-4
4
Nella cartella Opcode-OMS Application dove è stato
installato OMS, fare doppio clic su OMS Setup
per avviarlo.
Prima di accendere gli
apparecchi, accertarsi che
il livello del volume sia
al minimo. Si potrebbero
sentire comunque dei
suoni all’accensione, anche
se il volume è al minimo;
è normale e non c’è motivo
di preoccuparsi.
Deutsch
3
fig.3-5_35
5
Se compare una finestra di dialogo
come quella illustrata, fare clic su
[Turn It Off]. Verrà visualizzata
una finestra di dialogo di conferma;
fare clic su [OK].
English
fig.3-3
fig.3-3
Si consiglia di disattivare
AppleTalk selezionando
Chooser nel menu Apple.
Verrà visualizzata la finestra
di dialogo “Create a New Studio
Setup”. Fare clic su [Cancel].
Se è stato selezionato
accidentalmente il pulsante [OK],
fare clic su [Cancel] nella finestra
successiva.
Italiano
6
Français
fig.3-6_35
fig.3-8_35
Selezionare “Open” nel menu File.
Nella cartella Settings copiata
al passo 3, selezionare il file
PCR e fare clic su [Open].
Verrà visualizzata una finestra di
dialogo simile a quella illustrata.
Español
7
87
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Macintosh)
fig.3-9_35
8
Nel menu Edit selezionare
OMS MIDI Setup.
Nella finestra di dialogo OMS MIDI
Setup visualizzata, selezionare
Run MIDI in background e fare
clic su [OK].
fig.3-10
9
Nel menu File selezionare
Make Current.
A diamond mark (◊) indicate in the settings are enabled.
Se non è possibile selezionare Make
Current, vuol dire che è stata già
attivata e si può quindi passare
all’operazione successiva.
10 Accertarsi che la trasmissione e la ricezione MIDI siano corrette. Nel menu
Studio selezionare Test Studio.
fig.3-22_50
11 Prova a suonare la tastiera
PCR-30/50/80. Se la freccia sotto
al numero 2 o al numero 3
lampeggia (vedi diagramma
a destra), le impostazioni sono
state eseguite correttamente.
Spostando il cursore del mouse
vicino all’icona del connettore
MIDI, il puntatore cambierà forma
in quella di una nota musicale.
Se un modulo sonoro MIDI è
collegato alla presa MIDI OUT della tastiera PCR-30/50/80, fai click
sull’icona del connettore MIDI che appare nel diagramma a destra. Se viene
generato un suono, le impostazioni sono state eseguite correttamente.
88
Si consiglia di disattivare
AppleTalPer maggiori
informazioni sul collegamento del modulo sonoro
MIDI, fare riferimento
al manuale utente del
modulo sonoro MIDI.
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Macintosh)
12 Chiudere OMS Setup.
La procedura di collegamento dell’PCR-30/50/80 al Macintosh,
di installazione del driver MIDI e di configurazione del driver è giunta
al termine.
■ Impostazioni FreeMIDI
Utilizzare il cavo USB per collegare l’PCR-30/50/80 al computer.
1. Dopo aver spostato l’interruttore di alimentazione su OFF, collegare
il adattatore AC all’PCR-30/50/80.
2. Collegare il adattatore AC a una presa elettrica.
3. Utilizzare il cavo USB per collegare l’PCR-30/50/80 al computer.
4
5
6
7
8
9
Dal CD-ROM, copiare la cartella Driver E (Mac OS 9, 8) – FreeMIDI Setting
sul disco fisso del Macintosh.
Aprire la cartella FreeMIDI Applications dove è stata eseguita l’installazione
FreeMIDI e fare doppio clic sull’icona FreeMIDI Setup per avviare
l’applicazione.
Quando appare il messaggio “OMS is installed on this computer...”, fare
clic su [FreeMIDI].
Prima di accendere gli
apparecchi, accertarsi che
il livello del volume sia
al minimo. Si potrebbero
sentire comunque dei
suoni all’accensione, anche
se il volume è al minimo;
è normale e non c’è motivo
di preoccuparsi.
Français
3
Spostare l’interruttore di alimentazione dell’PCR-30/50/80 in posizione ON.
Italiano
2
Al primo avvio di FreeMIDI, comparirà la finestra di dialogo “Welcome
to FreeMIDI!”. Fare clic su [Continue].
Nella finestra di dialogo FreeMIDI Preferences, fare clic su [Cancel].
Español
1
Una volta terminati
i collegamenti, accendere
i vari dispositivi nell’ordine
indicato. Se i dispositivi
vengono accesi nell’ordine
sbagliato, si rischia di
provocare malfunzionamenti e/o danni ai
diffusori e agli altri
dispositivi.
Deutsch
English
Nel menu File selezionare [Exit]. Se appare la finestra di dialogo di conferma
AppleTalk confirmation, fare clic su [OK] per chiuderla.
Nella finestra di dialogo About Quick Setup, fare clic su [Cancel].
Nel menu File selezionare Open.
89
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Macintosh)
10 Selezionare PCR nella cartella FreeMIDI Setting copiata al passo 3 e fare
clic su [Open].
11 Controllare che l’invio e la ricezione MIDI siano corrette.
Nel menu MIDI selezionare Check Connections.
fig.3-13_40
12 Se un modulo sonoro MIDI è
collegato alla presa MIDI OUT
della tastiera PCR-30/50/80, fai
click sull’icona del connettore MIDI
che appare nel diagramma a destra.
Se viene generato un suono, le
impostazioni sono state eseguite
correttamente.
13 Scegliere di nuovo il comando Check Connections nel menu MIDI per
concludere il test.
14 Nel menu File, scegliere Quit per uscire da FreeMIDI Setup.
La procedura di collegamento dell’PCR-30/50/80 al Macintosh,
di installazione del driver MIDI e di configurazione del driver è giunta
al termine.
90
Si consiglia di disattivare
AppleTalPer maggiori
informazioni sul collegamento del modulo sonoro
MIDI, fare riferimento
al manuale utente del
modulo sonoro MIDI.
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Macintosh)
Utenti Mac OS X
1
2
English
■ Installazione del driver
Scollegare tutti i cavi USB a parte quelli della tastiera e del mouse e riavviare
il Macintosh.
Preparare il CD-ROM.
Inserire il CD nell’unità CD-ROM del computer.
Nella cartella Driver (Mac OS X) del CD-ROM, fare doppio clic su
PCRUSBDriver.pkg.
Deutsch
3
In Mac OS X v10.1.5, fare clic sul simbolo del lucchetto per l'autentificazione.
5
Nella finestra di dialogo authentication, immettere la password e fare clic
su [OK].
Sullo schermo comparirà il seguente messaggio “Welcome to the EDIROL
PCR USB Driver installation”.
Français
4
Fare clic su [Continue].
6
Verrà visualizzato il seguente messaggio “Important message”.
Controllare il contenuto della finestra e fare clic su [Continue].
7
Sullo schermo comparirà il messaggio “Select the location for
installation”.
8
Italiano
Selezionare l'unità dove è installato il sistema e fare clic su [Continue].
Verrà visualizzato il seguente messaggio “Easy installation”.
Fare clic su Install o Upgrade.
Sullo schermo comparirà il seguente messaggio “When you install this
software, you must restart your computer after the installation is
complete”.
Español
9
Fare clic su [Continue installation].
10 Verrà visualizzato il seguente messaggio “The software was successfully
installed”.
Fare clic su [Restart] per riavviare il Macintosh.
91
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Macintosh)
Precauzioni da rispettare quando si utilizza la tastiera PCR
Prima di utilizzare il software sequencer, tenere presente i seguenti punti.
* Collegare la tastiera PCR-30/50/80 al computer mediante il cavo USB prima di avviare il software
sequencer o altri programmi.
* Non scollegare il cavo USB dalla tastiera PCR-30/50/80 mentre è in esecuzione il software sequencer o un
altro programma.
* Scollegare il cavo USB dalla tastiera PCR-30/50/80 solo dopo aver chiuso il sequencer o qualsiasi altro
programma utilizzato.
* Non attivare la funzione Sleep del Macintosh.
* La tastiera PCR-30/50/80 non funziona nella configurazione Classic di Mac OS X. Utilizzare la tastiera
PCR quando la configurazione Classic non è in esecuzione.
92
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Macintosh)
■ Configurazione del driver
Utilizzare il cavo USB per collegare la tastiera PCR-30/50/80 al computer.
English
1. Dopo aver spostato l’interruttore di alimentazione su OFF, collegare
l’adattatore AC alla tastiera PCR-30/50/80.
2. Collegare l’adattatore AC a una presa elettrica.
3. Utilizzare il cavo USB per collegare la tastiera PCR-30/50/80
al computer.
Configurare la periferica MIDI sul sofware sequencer. Per maggiori
informazioni sulla periferica MIDI OUT/IN da selezionare, fare riferimento
alla sezione “About the ports when using a USB connection”(pag.159).
Per maggiori informazioni
sulle impostazioni della
periferica MIDI, fare
riferimento al manuale
del software utilizzato.
Français
La procedura di collegamento della tastiera PCR-30/50/80 al Macintosh,
di installazione del driver MIDI e di configurazione del driver è giunta
al termine.
Italiano
3
Spostare l’interruttore di alimentazione della tastiera PCR-30/50/80 in
posizione ON.
Español
2
Deutsch
1
93
Instalación y configuración del
controlador (Windows)
Instalación del controlador
El procedimiento de instalación variará en función del sistema.
Pase a uno de los siguientes apartados, en función del sistema que utilice.
• Usuarios de Windows XP ................................... (pág. 94)
• Usuarios de Windows 2000 ................................ (pág. 98)
• Usuarios de Windows Me/98 ............................ (pág. 101)
■ Usuarios de Windows XP
1
Con la unidad PCR-30/50/80 desconectada, inicie Windows.
Desconecte todos los cables USB excepto el del teclado USB y el ratón USB
(si se utilizan).
2
Abra el cuadro de diálogo Propiedades del sistema.
1. Haga clic en el menú Inicio de Windows y seleccione Panel de control.
2. En “Elija una categoría”, haga clic en “Rendimiento y mantenimiento”.
3. En “o elija un icono del Panel de control”, haga clic en el icono Sistema.
Si es usuario de
Windows XP Professional,
deberá iniciar la sesión
con un nombre de usuario
con algún tipo de cuenta
de administración (por
ejemplo, Administrador).
Para obtener información
detallada acerca de las
cuentas de usuario,
consulte al administrador
de sistemas de su PC.
fig.2-1
3
Haga clic en la ficha Hardware y,
a continuación, en [Firma del
controlador].
Abra el cuadro de diálogo
Opciones de firma del
controlador.
4
Asegúrese de que “¿Qué acción
desea que realice Windows?”
esté establecido en “Omitir”.
Si ya está establecido en “Omitir”,
haga clic en [Aceptar].
Si no está en “Omitir”, anótese
la configuración actual (“Avisar” o “Bloquear”). A continuación, cambie
la configuración a “Omitir” y haga clic en [Aceptar].
94
En función de cómo tenga
configurado el sistema,
puede que el icono
Sistema aparezca
directamente en el Panel
de control (en la vista
Clásica). En ese caso,
haga doble clic en el
icono Sistema.
Si ha modificado “¿Qué
acción desea que realice
Windows?” en el paso 4,
deberá restaurar la
configuración anterior
después de instalar
el controlador.
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Windows)
5
Haga clic en [Aceptar] para cerrar el cuadro de diálogo Propiedades
del sistema.
6
English
Salga de todo el software que se esté ejecutando (aplicaciones).
Cierre cualquier ventana que esté abierta. Si utiliza un programa antivirus
o software similar, también deberá cerrarlo.
7
Prepare el CD-ROM.
Inserte el CD-ROM en la unidad de CD-ROM del PC.
8
Deutsch
Haga clic en el botón Inicio de Windows. En el menú que aparecerá,
seleccione “Ejecutar...”.
Abra el cuadro de diálogo “Ejecutar...”.
fig.2-3_30
Français
En el cuadro de diálogo que aparece,
escriba lo siguiente en el campo
“Abrir” y haga clic en [Aceptar].
D:\DRIVER\USB_XP2K\SETUPINF.EXE
* El nombre de la unidad “D:” puede ser diferente para su sistema. Especifique el nombre
de su unidad de CD-ROM.
10 Aparecerá el cuadro de diálogo SetupInf.
Ahora puede instalar el controlador.
11 Utilice el cable USB para conectar la unidad PCR-30/50/80 al PC.
1. Con el interruptor de alimentación apagado (OFF), conecte el adaptador
de CA a la unidad PCR-30/50/80.
Una vez completadas las
conexiones, encienda los
diferentes aparatos en
el orden especificado.
Si enciende los aparatos
en un orden incorrecto,
podrían producirse
anomalías en el funcionamiento o daños en los
altavoces y otros aparatos.
Italiano
9
2. Conecte el adaptador de CA a una toma de corriente eléctrica.
12 Coloque el interruptor de alimentación de la unidad PCR-30/50/80 en
la posición ON (encendido).
Cerca de la barra de tareas, el PC indicará “Nuevo hardware encontrado”.
Espere, por favor.
Esta unidad viene
equipada con un circuito
de protección. Es necesario
dejar pasar un pequeño
intervalo (unos segundos)
después de encender la
unidad para que ésta
funcione correctamente.
95
Español
3. Utilice el cable USB para conectar la unidad PCR-30/50/80 al PC.
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Windows)
13 Aparecerá el Asistente para hardware nuevo encontrado.
Asegúrese de que la pantalla indique “EDIROL PCR”, seleccione “Instalar
desde una lista o ubicación específica (avanzado)” y haga clic en
[Siguiente].
fig.2-7
14 La pantalla indicará “Elija sus
opciones de búsqueda
e instalación”.
Seleccione “No buscar.
Seleccionaré el controlador
que se va a instalar” y haga
clic en [Siguiente].
15 Asegúrese de que el campo “Modelo” indique “EDIROL PCR”, y haga clic
en [Siguiente]. Entonces empezará la instalación del controlador.
Si el valor de “¿Qué acción desea que realice Windows?” no se ha establecido en “Omitir”,
aparecerá el cuadro de diálogo “Instalación de hardware”.
Si la opción “¿Qué acción desea que realice Windows?” está establecida en “Avisar”:
1.
Haga clic en [Continuar].
2.
Prosiga con la instalación.
Si la opción “¿Qué acción desea que realice Windows?” está establecida en “Avisar”:
1.
Haga clic en [Aceptar].
2.
Cuando aparezca “Asistente para hardware nuevo encontrado”, haga clic en [Finalizar].
3.
Efectúe la instalación tal como se describe en el apartado “Resolución de problemas” del
apartado Device Manager shows “?”, “!”, or “USB Composite Device” (pág. 172).
fig.2-9_30
16 Aparecerá el cuadro de diálogo Insertar disco.
Haga clic en [Aceptar].
17 Aparecerá el cuadro de diálogo Archivos necesarios.
Especifique lo siguiente en el campo “Copiar archivos de” y haga clic
en [Aceptar].
D:\Driver\USB_XP2K
* El nombre de la unidad “D:” puede ser diferente para su sistema. Especifique
el nombre de la unidad de CD-ROM.
96
Puede que el cuadro de
diálogo Insertar disco no
aparezca. En ese caso, vaya
al paso 17.
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Windows)
18 Aparecerá el Asistente para hardware nuevo encontrado.
English
Asegúrese de que la pantalla indica “EDIROL PCR” y haga clic en [Finalizar].
Espere hasta que aparezca “Nuevo hardware encontrado” cerca de la barra
de tareas.
19 Una vez finalizada la instalación del controlador, aparecerá el cuadro
de diálogo Cambio de configuración del sistema.
Haga clic en [Sí]. Windows se reiniciará automáticamente.
Si ha modificado “¿Qué acción desea que realice Windows?”
1.
Deutsch
Si ha modificado el valor para “¿Qué acción desea que realice Windows?” restaure la
configuración original después de reiniciar Windows.
Si es usuario de Windows XP Professional, debe iniciar la sesión de Windows
utilizando un nombre de usuario con algún tipo de cuenta de administración
(Administrador, por ejemplo).
2. Haga clic en el menú Inicio de Windows y seleccione Panel de control.
3. En “Elija una categoría”, haga clic en “Rendimiento y mantenimiento”.
Français
4. En “o elija un icono del Panel de control”, haga clic en el icono Sistema. Aparecerá
el cuadro de diálogo Propiedades del sistema.
* En función de cómo tenga configurado el sistema, puede que el icono Sistema aparezca directamente
en el Panel de control (en la vista Clásica). En ese caso, haga doble clic en el icono Sistema.
5. Haga clic en la ficha Hardware y, a continuación, en [Firma del controlador]. Aparecerá
el cuadro de diálogo Opciones de firma del controlador.
6. Restablezca el valor de ¿Qué acción desea que realice Windows? al valor original
(“Advertir” o “Bloquear”) y haga clic en [Aceptar].
Italiano
7. Haga clic en [Aceptar]. El cuadro de diálogo Propiedades del sistema se cerrará.
Español
A continuación, deberá configurar el controlador.
(➔ Destinos de entrada y salida MIDI (pág. 103))
97
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Windows)
■ Usuarios de Windows 2000
1
Con la unidad PCR-30/50/80 desconectada, inicie Windows.
Desconecte todos los cables USB excepto el del teclado USB y el ratón USB
(si se utilizan).
2
3
Inicie Windows con un usuario con privilegios administrativos
(como Administrador).
Abra el cuadro de diálogo Propiedades del sistema.
Haga clic en el botón Inicio y, en el menú que aparecerá, seleccione
Configuración | Panel de control. En Panel de control, haga doble clic
en el icono Sistema.
fig.2-12
4
Haga clic en la ficha Hardware y,
a continuación, en [Firma del
controlador].
Abra el cuadro de diálogo
Opciones de firma del
controlador.
5
Asegúrese de establecer
“Verificación de la firma
de archivo” en “Omitir”.
Si ya está establecido en “Omitir”,
haga clic en [Aceptar].
Si no está establecido en “Omitir”,
anote el valor actual (“Avisar” o “Bloquear”). A continuación, cambie
la configuración a “Omitir” y haga clic en [Aceptar].
6
Cierre el cuadro de diálogo Propiedades del sistema.
Haga clic en [Aceptar].
7
Salga de todo el software que se esté ejecutando (aplicaciones).
Cierre cualquier ventana que esté abierta. Si utiliza un programa antivirus
o software similar, también deberá cerrarlo.
8
Prepare el CD-ROM.
Inserte el CD-ROM en la unidad de CD-ROM del PC.
98
Si ha cambiado el valor
“Verificación de la firma
del archivo” en el paso 5,
deberá restaurar la
configuración anterior
después de instalar
el controlador.
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Windows)
9
Haga clic en el botón Inicio de Windows. En el menú que aparecerá,
seleccione “Ejecutar...”.
Abra el cuadro de diálogo “Ejecutar...”.
English
fig.2-14_40
10 En el cuadro de diálogo que aparecerá,
escriba lo siguiente en el campo
“Abrir” y haga clic en [Aceptar].
Ahora puede instalar el controlador.
12 Utilice el cable USB para conectar la unidad PCR-30/50/80 al PC.
1. Con el interruptor de alimentación apagado (OFF), conecte el
adaptador de CA a la unidad PCR-30/50/80.
2. Conecte el adaptador de CA a una toma de corriente eléctrica.
3. Utilice el cable USB para conectar la unidad PCR-30/50/80 al PC.
13 Coloque el interruptor de alimentación de la unidad PCR-30/50/80 en
la posición ON (encendido).
Esta unidad viene
equipada con un circuito
de protección. Es necesario
dejar pasar un pequeño
intervalo (unos segundos)
después de encender la
unidad para que ésta
funcione correctamente.
Français
11 Aparecerá el cuadro de diálogo SetupInf.
Una vez completadas las
conexiones, encienda los
diferentes aparatos en
el orden especificado.
Si enciende los aparatos
en un orden incorrecto,
podrían producirse
anomalías en el funcionamiento o daños en los
altavoces y otros aparatos.
Italiano
* El nombre de la unidad “D:” puede ser diferente para su sistema. Especifique
el nombre de la unidad de CD-ROM.
Deutsch
D:\DRIVER\USB_XP2K\SETUPINF.EXE
Si la configuración de “Verificación de la firma del archivo” no se ha establecido en “Omitir”,
aparecerá el cuadro de diálogo “No se ha encontrado la firma digital”.
1.
Haga clic en [Sí].
2.
Prosiga con la instalación.
Español
Si “Verificación de la firma del archivo” está establecida en “Avisar”:
Si “Verificación de la firma del archivo” está establecido en “Bloquear”:
1.
Haga clic en [Aceptar].
2.
Cuando aparezca “Asistente para hardware nuevo encontrado”, haga clic en [Finalizar].
3.
Efectúe la instalación tal como se describe en el apartado “Resolución de problemas” del apartado
Device Manager shows “?”, “!”, or “USB Composite Device” (pág. 172).
99
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Windows)
14 Aparecerá el cuadro de diálogo Insertar disco.
Haga clic en [Aceptar].
15 Aparecerá el cuadro de diálogo Archivos necesarios.
Especifique lo siguiente en el campo “Copiar archivos de” y haga clic
en [Aceptar].
Si no aparece el cuadro
de diálogo Insertar disco,
consulte el apartado The
“Insert Disk” dialog box
does not appear
(pág. 171).
D:\Drivers\USB_XP2K
* El nombre de la unidad “D:” puede ser diferente para su sistema. Especifique
el nombre de la unidad de CD-ROM.
16 Es posible que aparezca el “Asistente para hardware nuevo encontrado”.
Compruebe que “EDIROL PCR” aparece en pantalla y haga clic en [Finalizar].
17 Puede que aparezca el cuadro de diálogo Cambio de configuración
del sistema.
Haga clic en [Sí]. Windows se reiniciará automáticamente.
Si ha cambiado “Verificación de la firma del archivo”
Si ha modificado el valor de “Verificación de la firma del archivo”, restaure el valor original
después de que se reinicie Windows.
1. Una vez se haya reiniciado Windows, inicie la sesión de Windows como un usuario con
privilegios de administración (como por ejemplo Administrador).
2. En el escritorio de Windows, haga clic con el botón secundario del ratón en el icono
Mi PC y, en el menú que aparecerá, seleccione Propiedades. Aparecerá el cuadro
de diálogo Propiedades del sistema.
3. Haga clic en la ficha Hardware y, a continuación, haga clic en [Firma del controlador].
Aparecerá el cuadro de diálogo Opciones de firma del controlador.
4. Vuelva a establecer la configuración original de “Verificación de firma del controlador”
(ya sea “Avisar” o “Bloquear”) y haga clic en [Aceptar].
5. Haga clic en [Aceptar]. El cuadro de diálogo Propiedades del sistema se cerrará.
A continuación, deberá configurar el controlador.
(➔ Destinos de entrada y salida MIDI (pág. 103))
100
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Windows)
■ Usuarios de Windows Me/98
1
Con la unidad PCR-30/50/80 desconectada, inicie Windows.
2
English
Desconecte todos los cables USB excepto el del teclado USB y el ratón USB
(si se utilizan).
Salga de todo el software que se esté ejecutando (aplicaciones).
Cierre cualquier ventana que esté abierta. Si utiliza un programa antivirus
o software similar, también deberá cerrarlo.
3
Prepare el CD-ROM.
4
Deutsch
Inserte el CD-ROM en la unidad de CD-ROM del PC.
Haga clic en el botón Inicio de Windows. En el menú que aparecerá,
seleccione “Ejecutar...”
Abra el cuadro de diálogo “Ejecutar...”.
fig.2-19a_30
En el cuadro de diálogo que
aparecerá, escriba lo siguiente
en el campo “Abrir” y haga clic
en [Aceptar].
Français
5
D:\Driver\USB_ME98\SETUPINF.EXE
Aparecerá el cuadro de diálogo SetupInf.
Ahora puede instalar el controlador.
Español
6
Italiano
* El nombre de la unidad “D:” puede ser diferente para su sistema. Especifique
el nombre de la unidad de CD-ROM.
101
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Windows)
7
Utilice el cable USB para conectar la unidad PCR-30/50/80 al PC.
1. Con el interruptor de alimentación apagado (OFF), conecte el
adaptador de CA a la unidad PCR-30/50/80.
2. Conecte el adaptador de CA a una toma de corriente eléctrica.
3. Utilice el cable USB para conectar la unidad PCR-30/50/80 al PC.
8
Coloque el interruptor de alimentación de la unidad PCR-30/50/80 en la
posición ON (encendido).
9 El controlador se instalará automáticamente.
10 En el cuadro de diálogo, haga clic en [Aceptar].
* Si aparece un mensaje que le recomienda que reinicie Windows, reinicie el sistema
operativo como se le indica.
A continuación, deberá configurar el controlador.
(➔ Destinos de entrada y salida MIDI (pág. 103))
102
Una vez completadas las
conexiones, encienda los
diferentes aparatos en el
orden especificado. Si
enciende los aparatos en
un orden incorrecto,
podrían producirse
anomalías en el funcionamiento o daños en los
altavoces y otros aparatos.
Esta unidad viene
equipada con un circuito
de protección. Es necesario
dejar pasar un pequeño
intervalo (unos segundos)
después de encender la
unidad para que ésta
funcione correctamente.
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Windows)
Configuración
■ Destinos de entrada y salida MIDI
Abra el Panel de control.
Haga clic en el botón Inicio y, en el menú que aparecerá, seleccione
Configuración | Panel de control.
2
Abra el cuadro de diálogo Propiedades de sonidos y dispositivos de
audio (o Propiedades de sonidos y multimedia, en Windows 2000 o ME).
Windows XP
En “Elija una categoría”, haga clic en “Dispositivos de sonido, audio
y voz”. A continuación, en “o elija un icono del Panel de control”,
haga clic en el icono Dispositivos de sonido y audio.
Windows 2000/Me
En Panel de control, haga doble clic en el icono Sonidos y multimedia para
abrir el cuadro de diálogo “Propiedades de sonidos y multimedia”.
3
En función de cómo tenga
configurado el sistema,
puede que el icono
Dispositivos de sonido
y audio aparezca
directamente en el Panel
de control (en la vista
Clásica). En ese caso,
haga doble clic en el
icono Dispositivos
de sonido y audio.
Français
Windows XP
Haga clic en el botón Inicio de Windows y, en el menú que aparecerá,
seleccione Panel de control.
Deutsch
1
English
Usuarios de Windows XP/2000/Me
Haga clic en la ficha Audio.
Para la reproducción de música MIDI,
haga clic en ▼ que aparece a la derecha
de [Dispositivo predeterminado]
(o [Dispositivo preferido] en Windows
2000/Me) y seleccione el dispositivo
MIDI en la lista que aparece.
Para utilizar Media Player para reproducir
el audio de un módulo de sonido
conectado al conector MIDI OUT del PCR,
seleccione EDIROL PCR MIDI OUT.
5
Seleccione el dispositivo
MIDI apropiado para el
sistema. No tiene por qué
seleccionar necesariamente
EDIROL PCR MIDI OUT.
Para obtener más
información, consulte
el apartado “About the
ports when using a USB
connection” (pág. 159).
Español
4
Italiano
fig.2-28_30
Cierre el cuadro de diálogo Propiedades de sonidos y dispositivos
de audio.
Haga clic en Aceptar para finalizar la configuración.
103
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Windows)
6
Configure el dispositivo MIDI en el software secuenciador. Para obtener
información sobre el dispositivo MIDI OUT/IN que debe seleccionar,
consulte el apartado About the ports when using a USB connection
(pág. 159).
Si desea obtener detalles
sobre la configuración
de dispositivos MIDI,
consulte el manual del
usuario que se adjunta
con el software.
Con esto finaliza la configuración del controlador.
Usuarios de Windows 98
1
Abra el Panel de control.
Haga clic en el botón Inicio y, en el menú que aparecerá, seleccione
Configuración | Panel de control.
2
Abra el cuadro de diálogo Propiedades multimedia.
En Panel de control, haga doble clic en el icono Multimedia para abrir
el cuadro de diálogo Propiedades multimedia.
fig.2-29_30
3
4
Haga clic en la ficha MIDI.
Especifique la “Salida de MIDI”.
Seleccione [Instrumento único]
y seleccione el dispositivo MIDI
en la lista que aparece.
Para utilizar Media Player para
reproducir el audio de un módulo
de sonido conectado al conector MIDI
OUT del PCR, seleccione EDIROL
PCR MIDI OUT.
5
6
Cierre el cuadro de diálogo Propiedades multimedia.
Haga clic en Aceptar para finalizar la configuración.
Configure el dispositivo MIDI en el software secuenciador. Para obtener
información sobre el dispositivo MIDI OUT/IN que debe seleccionar, consulte
el apartado “About the ports when using a USB connection” (pág. 159).
Con esto finaliza la configuración del controlador.
104
Seleccione el dispositivo
MIDI apropiado para el
sistema. No tiene por qué
seleccionar necesariamente
EDIROL PCR MIDI OUT.
Para obtener más
información, consulte
el apartado “About the
ports when using a USB
connection” (pág. 159).
Si desea obtener detalles
sobre la configuración
de dispositivos MIDI,
consulte el manual del
propietario que se adjunta
con el software que esté
utilizando.
English
Instalación y configuración
del controlador (Macintosh)
The installation procedure will differ depending on your system.
Please proceed to one of the following sections, depending on the system you use.
• Mac OS 9/8 users ................................................. (pág. 105)
• Mac OS X users ..................................................... (pág. 105)
Deutsch
Usuarios de Mac OS 9/8
■ Instalación del controlador
Utilice OMS o FreeMIDI como controlador MIDI.
El controlador del PCR-30/50/80 que se incluye es un módulo adicional
para utilizar el PCR-30/50/80 con OMS o FreeMIDI.
OMS se encuentra en
la carpeta OMS 2.3.8 E
dentro de la carpeta OMS
* Debe instalar OMS o FreeMIDI en su Macintosh, según el software secuenciador
que vaya a utilizar.
Lleve a cabo el siguiente procedimiento para instalar el controlador del
PCR-30/50/80.
Français
del CD-ROM. Si desea
obtener más información
sobre OMS, consulte
el manual en línea
OMS_2.3_Mac.pdf en
la carpeta OMS2.3.8E
que se encuentra dentro
de la carpeta OMS del
CD-ROM.
* Desconecte el PCR-30/50/80 del Macintosh antes de realizar la instalación.
Italiano
Si el PCR-30/50/80 está encendido, al iniciarse el Macintosh aparecerá un mensaje como el
siguiente. Realice los pasos que se describen a continuación según el mensaje que se muestre.
Si la pantalla indica:
“Driver required for USB device ‘unknown device’ is not available. Search for driver
on the Internet?”
➔ Haga clic en [Cancel].
Español
Si la pantalla indica:
“Software required for using device ‘unknown device’ cannot be found. Please refer
to the manual included with the device, and install the necessary software”
➔ Haga clic en [OK].
105
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Macintosh)
1
Salga de todo el software que se esté ejecutando (aplicaciones).
Si utiliza un programa antivirus o software similar, también debe cerrarlo.
2
Prepare el CD-ROM.
Inserte el CD-ROM en la unidad de CD-ROM.
3
4
Haga doble clic en el icono PCR Driver-E Installer (que se encuentra en la
carpeta Driver E (Mac OS 9, 8) del CD-ROM) para iniciar el programa de
instalación.
Verifique la ubicación de la instalación y haga clic en [Install].
fig.3-2_40
5
Si aparece un mensaje como el
siguiente, haga clic en [Continue].
Saldrá de todas las aplicaciones que
se estén ejecutando y proseguirá
con la instalación.
6
Aparecerá un cuadro de diálogo que indicará Installation completed.
Haga clic en [Restart] para reiniciar el Macintosh.
■ Configuración
Configuración de OMS
1
Utilice el cable USB para conectar el PCR-30/50/80 al PC.
1. Con el interruptor de alimentación en OFF, conecte el adaptador de CA
al PCR-30/50/80.
2. Conecte el adaptador de CA a una toma de corriente eléctrica.
3. Utilice el cable USB para conectar el PCR-30/50/80 al PC.
2
Disponga el interruptor de alimentación del PCR-30/50/80 en la
posición ON.
fig.3-3
3
106
En el CD-ROM, arrastre la carpeta Driver E (Mac OS 9, 8) OMS Setting al disco duro del Macintosh para copiarla.
Establecidas las
conexiones, encienda los
diferentes dispositivos en
el orden especificado. Si
enciende los dispositivos
en un orden incorrecto,
puede causar anomalías en
el funcionamiento o daños
en los altavoces y otros
aparatos.
Asegúrese siempre de
tener bajado el volumen
antes de encender la
unidad. Aunque tenga el
volumen completamente
bajado, puede que oiga
algún sonido al encender
la unidad, pero esto es algo
normal y no es indicio de
un mal funcionamiento.
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Macintosh)
fig.3-4
En la carpeta Opcode-OMS Application donde
ha instalado OMS, haga doble clic en OMS Setup
para iniciarlo.
English
4
fig.3-5_35
Si aparece un cuadro de diálogo
como éste, haga clic en [Turn It
Off]. Aparecerá un cuadro de
diálogo de confirmación; haga clic
en [OK].
Es conveniente desactivar
AppleTalk, seleccionando
Chooser en el menú
Apple.
Deutsch
5
fig.3-6_35
Aparecerá el cuadro de diálogo
Create a New Studio Setup.
Haga clic en [Cancel].
Si, por error, hace clic en [OK],
haga clic en [Cancel] en la
siguiente pantalla.
Français
6
fig.3-8_35
7
Elija “Open” en el menú File.
Italiano
En la carpeta Setting que ha
copiado en el paso 3, seleccione el
archivo PCR y haga clic en [Open].
Aparecerá una pantalla como ésta.
fig.3-9_35
En el menú Edit, seleccione OMS
MIDI Setup.
En el cuadro de diálogo OMS MIDI
Setup que aparece, marque
Run MIDI in background y haga
clic en [OK].
Español
8
107
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Macintosh)
fig.3-10
9
En el menú File, elija Make
Current.
A diamond mark (◊) indicate in the settings are enabled.
Si no puede seleccionar Make
Current, significa que ya se ha
aplicado y puede continuar por
el siguiente paso.
10 Compruebe que la transmisión y la recepción MIDI se realicen
correctamente. En el menú Studio, seleccione Test Studio.
fig.2-22_50
11 Pruebe de tocar el teclado del
PCR-30/50/80. Si la flecha al lado
del número 2 ó 3 del diagrama
de la derecha parpadea, significa
que los ajustes se han realizado
correctamente. Cuando mueva
el cursor del mouse cerca del icono
del conector MIDI, el cursor
cambiará a sostenido (nota
musical).
Si un módulo de sonido MIDI se
conecta al conector MIDI OUT del PCR-30/50/80, pulse el icono del
conector MIDI mostrado en el diagrama de la derecha. Si escucha sonido, los
ajustes se han realizado correctamente.
12 Salga de OMS Setup.
En el menú File, elija [Exit]. Si aparece el cuadro de diálogo AppleTalk
confirmation, haga clic en [OK] para cerrarlo.
Con esto, habrá completado todos los pasos necesarios para conectar el
PCR-30/50/80 al Macintosh, instalar el controlador MIDI y efectuar la
configuración del controlador.)
108
Para obtener
información sobre cómo
conectar un módulo de
sonido MIDI, consulte
el manual del usuario
de su módulo de sonido
MIDI.
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Macintosh)
1. Con el interruptor de alimentación en OFF, conecte el adaptador de CA
al PCR-30/50/80.
2. Conecte el adaptador de CA a una toma de corriente eléctrica.
3. Utilice el cable USB para conectar el PCR-30/50/80 al PC.
2
3
4
5
6
7
Disponga el interruptor de alimentación del PCR-30/50/80 en la
posición ON.
Desde el CD-ROM, copie la carpeta Driver E (Mac OS 9, 8) - FreeMIDI
Setting en el disco duro del Macintosh.
Abra la carpeta FreeMIDI Applications desde la ubicación en la que ha
instalado FreeMIDI y haga doble clic en el icono FreeMIDI Setup para iniciarlo.
Cuando aparezca “OMS is installed on this computer...”, haga clic en [FreeMIDI].
Establecidas las
conexiones, encienda los
diferentes dispositivos en
el orden especificado. Si
enciende los dispositivos
en un orden incorrecto,
puede causar anomalías en
el funcionamiento o daños
en los altavoces y otros
aparatos.
Asegúrese siempre de
tener bajado el volumen
antes de encender la
unidad. Aunque tenga el
volumen completamente
bajado, puede que oiga
algún sonido al encender
la unidad, pero esto es algo
normal y no es indicio de
un mal funcionamiento.
La primera vez que inicie el software, aparecerá el cuadro de diálogo
“Welcome to FreeMIDI!”. Haga clic en [Continue].
Deutsch
Utilice el cable USB para conectar el PCR-30/50/80 al PC.
Français
1
English
Configuración de FreeMIDI
Cuando aparezca el cuadro de diálogo FreeMIDI Preferences, haga clic
en [Cancel].
Italiano
8 Cuando aparezca el cuadro de diálogo About Quick Setup, haga clic en [Cancel].
9 En el menú File, elija Open.
10 Seleccione PCR en la carpeta FreeMIDI Setting que ha copiado en el paso 3
y haga clic en [Open].
11 Compruebe que la transmisión y la recepción MIDI se realicen correctamente.
Español
En el menú MIDI, seleccione Check Connections.
109
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Macintosh)
fig.3-13_40
12 Si un módulo de sonido MIDI
se conecta al conector MIDI OUT
del PCR-30/50/80, pulse el icono
del conector MIDI mostrado
en el diagrama de la derecha.
Si escucha sonido, los ajustes se
han realizado correctamente.
13 Vuelva a elegir el comando Check Connections del menú MIDI para
finalizar la prueba.
14 En el menú File, seleccione Quit para salir de FreeMIDI Setup.
Con esto, habrá completado todos los pasos necesarios para conectar
el PCR-30/50/80 al Macintosh, instalar el controlador MIDI y efectuar
la configuración del controlador.)
Usuarios de Mac OS X
■ Instalación del controlador
1
2
Desconecte todos los cables USB que no sean del teclado o del ratón
y reinicie el sistema Macintosh.
Prepare el CD-ROM.
Inserte el CD-ROM en la unidad de CD-ROM del sistema.
3
En la carpeta Driver (Mac OS X) del CD-ROM, haga doble clic en
PCRUSBDriver.pkg.
En Mac OS X v10.1.5, haga clic en el símbolo de bloqueo para la autentificación.
4
110
En el cuadro de diálogo de authentication (autentificación), escriba la
contraseña y haga clic en [OK] (Aceptar).
Para obtener
información sobre cómo
conectar un módulo de
sonido MIDI, consulte
el manual del usuario
de su módulo de sonido
MIDI.
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Macintosh)
5
La pantalla indicará “Welcome to EDIROL PCR USB Driver installation”
(Bienvenido a la instalación del controlador USB del PCR de Edirol).
6
English
Haga clic en [Continue] (Continuar).
La pantalla indicará “Important message” (Mensaje importante).
Lea su contenido y haga clic en [Continue] (Continuar).
7
La pantalla indicará “Select the location for installation” (Seleccione la
ubicación de instalación).
8
Deutsch
Seleccione la unidad en la que esté instalado el sistema operativo haciendo
clic sobre la misma y, a continuación, haga clic en [Continue] (Continuar).
La pantalla indicará “Easy installation” (Instalación fácil).
Haga clic en Install (Instalar) o Upgrade (Actualizar).
9
La pantalla indicará “When you install this software, you must restart
your computer after the installation is complete” (Al instalar el software,
debe reiniciar el sistema una vez finalizada la instalación).
Français
Haga clic en [Continue installation] (Continuar la instalación).
10 La pantalla indicará “The software was successfully installed”
(El software se ha instalado correctamente).
Haga clic en [Restart] (Reiniciar) para reiniciar el sistema.
Precauciones al utilizar el PCR
Italiano
Antes de utilizar el software secuenciador, tenga en cuenta los siguientes aspectos:
* Conecte el PCR-30/50/80 al sistema mediante un cable USB antes de iniciar el software secuenciador
u otro software.
* No desconecte el cable USB del PCR-30/50/80 mientras se esté ejecutando el software secuenciador u otro
software.
* Desconecte el cable USB del PCR-30/50/80 sólo después de haber salido del software secuenciador u otro
software.
* Deje la función Sleep del Macintosh desactivada.
Español
* El PCR-30/50/80 no funcionará en el entorno Classic de Mac OS X. Utilice el PCR cuando no se esté
ejecutando el entorno Classic.
111
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Macintosh)
■ Configuración del controlador
1
Utilice el cable USB para conectar el PCR-30/50/80 al sistema.
1. Con el interruptor POWER apagado (OFF), conecte el adaptador de CA
al PCR-30/50/80.
2. Conecte el adaptador de CA a una toma de corriente eléctrica.
3. Utilice el cable USB para conectar el PCR-30/50/80 al sistema.
2
3
Coloque el Interruptor POWER del PCR-30/50/80 en la posición ON
(encendido).
Configure el dispositivo MIDI en el software secuenciador. Para obtener más
información sobre el aparato MIDI de entrada/salida que debe seleccionar,
consulte el apartado “About the ports when using a USB connection”
(pág. 159).
Con esto se finaliza el procedimiento para conectar el PCR-30/50/80 al
sistema Macintosh, instalar el controlador MIDI y configurar el controlador.
112
Si desea obtener detalles
sobre la configuración de
aparatos MIDI, consulte
el manual del usuario para
el software que esté
utilizando.
Operation
The PCR-30/50/80 is a controller that transmits MIDI messages. You cannot perform using only
the PCR-30/50/80 by itself. You will need to connect it to a sound module or computer.
The various controllers ([R1--R8], [S1--S8], [B1--B6], [L1--L3], [P1, P2]) can be assigned almost any
message you want to get the control you need for your particular setup. For details on the messages
that can be assigned, refer to “Controller settings” (p. 126).
113
Connection and MIDI data flow
This section explains how to make basic connections for the PCR-30/50/80.
* To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other devices, always turn down the volume, and turn
off the power on all devices before making any connections.
* Use only the specified expression pedal (EV-5; sold separately). By connecting any other expression pedals,
you risk causing malfunction and/or damage to the unit.
When using MIDI connections
fig.connect-usb
MIDI sound module (sold separately)
AC adaptor
MIDI IN
DP-2 (sold separately)
EV-5 (sold separately)
MIDI OUT
PCR-30/50/80
MIDI OUT
BULK RECEPTION
MIDI IN
PORT 1
PORT 2 /
BULK TRANSMISSION
* For an explanation of the items in the diagram, refer to “About the ports when using a USB
connection” (p. 159).
114
Connection and MIDI data flow
When using a USB connection
fig.connect-usb
AC adaptor
USB cable
It is not necessary to connect the
AC adaptor if you are using a USB
connection. However, with some
computers, the PCR-30/50 may
not operate when powered from
the USB bus. In this case, set the
power switch to the DC position
and connect the AC adaptor.
DP-2 (sold separately)
dnaloR
EV-5 (sold separately)
V-LINK OFF
PC
MIDI OUT DEVICE
PCR-30/50/80
USB
EDIROL PCR MIDI OUT
MIDI OUT
EDIROL PCR
BULK RECEPTION
MIDI IN DEVICE
EDIROL PCR MIDI IN
MIDI IN
EDIROL PCR 1
PORT 1
EDIROL PCR 2
PORT 2 /
BULK TRANSMISSION
V-LINK ON
PC
MIDI OUT DEVICE
PCR-30/50/80
USB
EDIROL PCR MIDI OUT
EDIROL PCR
MIDI OUT
BULK
RECEPTION
MIDI IN DEVICE
EDIROL PCR MIDI IN
MIDI IN
EDIROL PCR 1
PORT 1
EDIROL PCR 2
PORT 2 /
BULK TRANSMISSION
* If V-LINK is ON, PCR 1 and PCR 2 messages will be sent both to USB and to the MIDI connector.
* For an explanation of the items in the diagram, refer to “About the ports when using a USB
connection” (p. 159).
115
Basic operation
How to switch modes
You can switch modes at any time, as shown below.
Mode
Switcing modes
PLAY mode
(p. 117)
When you turn on the power, the PCR-30/50/80
will start up in PLAY mode.
Explanation
Transmit MIDI messages by
playing the keyboard or
operating the controllers.
Press the [MIDI CH] button.
MIDI Channel mode
(MIDI CH)
(p. 118)
Program Change
mode
(PROGRAM
CHANGE)
(p. 119)
Bank mode
(BANK)
(p. 120)
Memory mode
(MEMORY)
(p. 121)
Snapshot mode
(SNAPSHOT)
(p. 122)
Panic mode
(PANIC)
(p. 123)
Set the transmit channel
(current channel) for the
keyboard and bender lever.
Press the [PROGRAM
CHANGE] button.
Simultaneously press the
[PROGRAM CHANGE]
button and [MIDI CH]
button.
Press the [MEMORY]
button.
Simultaneously press the
[MEMORY] button and the
[MIDI CH] button.
Simultaneously press the
[PROGRAM CHANGE]
button and the [EDIT]
button.
Transmit program change
messages on the current
channel.
Transmit bank select
messages (MSB, LSB) on the
current channel.
Recall a memory set from
internal memory into the
current memory (p. 136).
Transmit the current values
of all controllers ([R1--R8],
[S1--S8]) at once.
Stop "stuck" notes or other
problems with the sound on a
connected MIDI sound
module.
Press the [EDIT] button.
Edit mode
(EDIT)
(p. 125)
Assign MIDI messages to the
controllers, transmit/receive
bulk data, or make system
settings.
You are returned to Play mode once a setting or a process has been completed within the other
modes. If you want to return to Play mode without completing a setting or operation, press the
button for the current mode (i.e., the button that is lit). Alternatively, press the [CANCEL] button.
The setting you were in the process of making will be discarded.
116
Basic operation
PLAY mode
When you power up the PCR-30/50/80, it will start up in PLAY mode. The display will show
the current channel (p. 118).
* The PCR-30/50/80 will start up according to the Startup Memory settings (p. 164). With the factory
settings, it will start up with the GM2 MEMORY. For the messages that are assigned to each controller
by the GM2 MEMORY, refer to p. 164.
■ Controllers you can operate
[R1–R8], [S1–S8], [B1–B6]
[L1–L3], [P1, P2]
[OCTAVE -/+]
[TRANSPOSE]+[OCTAVE -/+]
Bender lever
Keyboard
These controllers will transmit the messages that are assigned
to each.
* The transmitted value will be shown in the display.
Octave shift
* [OCTAVE -] or [OCTAVE +] will light depending on the current
octave shift setting. The actual octave shift value will appear in
the display only while you are editing the setting (-4–5).
Transpose
* If you hold down [TRANSPOSE] for a while, [OCTAVE -] or
[OCTAVE +] will light depending on the current transpose
setting. The actual transpose value will appear in the display
only while you are editing the setting (-12–12).
Bender or modulation messages will be transmitted on the
current channel
Note messages will be transmitted on the current channel
* Octave Shift and Transpose are set independently.
* If you simultaneously press [OCTAVE -] and [OCTAVE +], the Octave Shift setting will be reset to 0.
* If you hold down [TRANSPOSE] and press [OCTAVE -] and [OCTAVE +] simultaneously, the Transpose
setting will be reset to 0.
117
Basic operation
MIDI Channel mode (MIDI CH)
This mode lets you set the transmission channel (current channel) of the keyboard and bender
lever.
Each controller has its own independent transmission channel setting. However, if OMNI mode
(p. 149) is on, the controllers will also transmit on the current channel you specify here.
fig.MIDIch-1_80
3
1
1 2
Press the [MIDI CH] button.
The [MIDI CH] button will light. The display will show the current channel setting.
* The [HEX] or [DECIMAL] button will also light according to the input mode (p. 158).
2
Use the [DEC] [INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys of the keyboard to specify
the desired channel number.
DEC
INC
0–F
3
Change the current value by -1
Change the current value by +1
The input value
HEX...0–F
DECIMAL...1–16
Press the [ENTER] button.
The setting will be cancelled if you press another button instead of the [ENTER] button.
The current channel has now been set.
118
Basic operation
Program Change mode (PROGRAM CHANGE)
This mode lets you transmit a program change message on the current channel.
fig.PC-1_80
3
1
1
2
Press the [PROGRAM CHANGE] button.
The [PROGRAM CHANGE] button will light. The display will indicate the program change that
was transmitted most recently.
* The [HEX] or [DECIMAL] button will also light according to the input mode (p. 158).
2
Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys of the keyboard to specify the
program change you want to transmit.
DEC
INC
0–F
3
Change the current value by -1
Change the current value by +1
The input value
HEX...00–7F
DECIMAL...1–128
Press the [ENTER] button.
The setting will be cancelled if you press another button instead of the [ENTER] button.
The program change has now been transmitted.
119
Basic operation
Bank mode (BANK)
This mode lets you transmit a bank select (MSB, LSB) message on the current channel. The program
change message you most recently transmitted (specified) in Program Change mode (p. 119) will
also be transmitted following the bank select message.
fig.BANK-1_80
3,5
1
1
2,4
Simultaneously press the [PROGRAM CHANGE] button and [MIDI CH]
button.
The [PROGRAM CHANGE] and [MIDI CH] buttons will light. The display will indicate the most
recently transmitted bank select (MSB) value.
* The [HEX] or [DECIMAL] button will also light according to the input mode (p. 158).
fig.BANK-2
2
First, specify the bank select MSB (CC#00).
Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys of the keyboard to specify the bank select
MSB that you want to transmit.
*1 Reference
3
Press the [ENTER] button.
The setting will be cancelled if you press another button instead of the [ENTER] button.
fig.BANK-3
4
Next, specify the bank select LSB (CC#32).
The display will indicate the most recently transmitted bank select (LSB) value.
Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys of the keyboard to specify the bank select
LSB that you want to transmit.
5
*1 Reference
Press the [ENTER] button.
The setting will be cancelled if you press another button instead of the [ENTER] button.
The bank select has now been transmitted.
120
*1 The -- area displays the currently set value. If it has not been set, the default setting will be displayed. Even if you change the type or mode
of the MIDI message that is assigned, the default setting will be displayed. This will be lit if the value is the same as the currently set value,
or will blink if the value is different.
Basic operation
Memory mode (MEMORY)
This mode lets you recall one of the stored memory sets into the current memory (p. 148).
When the PCR-30/50/80 is shipped, its internal memory contains sixteen different settings.
For details on the contents of each memory number, refer to “Memory sets” (p. 164).
If you edit the controller settings of a memory you recall, and want to keep your changes, you must
save the memory before powering down the PCR-30/50/80. For the procedure, refer to
“EDIT-Save” p. 148.
For details on customizing (editing) the controller settings, refer to “Edit mode (EDIT)” (p. 125).
fig.memory-1_80
3
1
1
2
Press the [MEMORY] button.
The [MEMORY] button will light. The display will indicate the memory number that you selected
most recently.
2
3
Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys of the keyboard to specify the
memory number that you want to recall.
Press the [ENTER] button.
The setting will be cancelled if you press another button instead of the [ENTER] button.
The memory has now been recalled.
121
Basic operation
Snapshot mode (SNAPSHOT)
Once you have set the various controllers to the desired settings, you can transmit a detailed
description of this state in the form of a “snapshot”. When you execute this function, the current
values of the controllers ([R1–R8], [S1–S8]) will be transmitted.
This is convenient when you want to record the state of these controllers together at the beginning
of a song in your sequencer, as the initial values.
fig.snap-1_80
2
1
1
Simultaneously press the [MEMORY] button and the [MIDI CH] button.
The [MEMORY] and [MIDI CH] buttons will light.
2
Press the [ENTER] button.
The [MEMORY] button and [MIDI CH] button will blink several times.
The snapshot will be transmitted.
122
Basic operation
Panic mode (PANIC)
If notes on a connected MIDI sound module become “stuck”, or if there is something wrong
with the sound, you can execute the Panic function to solve the problem.
When you execute the Panic function, All Sound Off, All Notes Off, and Reset All Controllers
messages will be transmitted on all channels.
fig.panic-1_80
2
1
1
Simultaneously press the [PROGRAM CHANGE] button and [EDIT] button.
The [PROGRAM CHANGE] button and [EDIT] button will light.
2
Press the [ENTER] button.
The [PROGRAM CHANGE] button and [EDIT] button will blink.
The Panic function has now been executed.
123
MEMO
124
Edit mode (EDIT)
Press the [EDIT] button to enter Edit mode. In Edit mode you can make
the following settings.
fig.edit-1
fig.edt
Selected item
[R1--R8]
[S1--S8]
[B1--B6]
[L1--L3]
[P1, P2]
Display
Refer to
Description
“Controller settings”
(p. 126)
Assign a desired MIDI message
to the controller.
Keyboard
[BULK]
“BULK” (p. 151)
Transmit or receive the contents of
a memory set as bulk data.
Keyboard
[SYSTEM]
“SYSTEM” (p. 154)
Make system settings for the PCR.
Keyboard
[SAVE]
“SAVE” (p. 148)
Save the current memory settings
into a memory.
Indicates the number of
the selected controller
Keyboard
[OMNI]
“OMNI” (p. 149)
Keyboard
[PROTECT]
“PROTECT” (p. 150)
Specify whether the output channel
and output port for messages will
follow the setting of the controller
or the system setting.
Specify whether ALL BULK
reception and SAVE operations will
be prohibited.
For details, refer to the explanation of how to set each item.
125
Edit mode (EDIT)
Controller settings
You can assign the following functions to a controller.
* After you have modified the controller settings, perform the “SAVE” (p. 148) operation as needed. If you
turn off the power without executing “SAVE”, your changes will be lost.
NOTE
“NOTE ASSIGN” (p. 127)
AFTERTOUCH
“AFTERTOUCH ASSIGN” (p. 129)
CONTROL CHANGE
“CONTROL CHANGE ASSIGN” (p. 132)
PROGRAM CHANGE
“PROGRAM CHANGE ASSIGN” (p. 135)
RPN
“RPN/NRPN ASSIGN” (p. 138)
NRPN
“RPN/NRPN ASSIGN” (p. 138)
SYSTEM Ex.
“SYS EX. ASSIGN” (p. 140)
TEMPO
“TEMPO ASSIGN” (p. 146)
NO ASSIGN
“NO ASSIGN” (p. 146)
A Copy function is also available. For the procedure, refer to “ASSIGN COPY” (p. 147).
* For NOTE, AFTERTOUCH, CONTROL CHANGE, PROGRAM CHANGE, RPN, NRPN, and
SYSTEM Ex., the rightmost digit (third place) in the display is a number that indicates the mode (Basic mode
or Advanced mode).
* If you want to assign a single-byte system message (system realtime message, tune request) or a freely
specified message of up to 24 bytes, refer to “SYS EX. ASSIGN” (p. 140).
How Basic mode and Advanced mode differ
Each assignment can be made either in Basic mode or Advanced mode.
Use the mode that is appropriate for your purpose.
•Basic mode
You can make assignments easily, with the minimum number of steps.
•Advanced mode A greater number of steps are required, but you can specify more
parameters and make more sophisticated assignments.
126
Edit mode (EDIT)
■ NOTE ASSIGN
Here’s how to assign a Note message to a controller. In addition to being used to play sounds, note
messages can also be used to control a sequencer.
Mode
Basic mode
Advanced mode
Keyboard
0
1
Velocity
100 (64H)
Assignable
Port
PCR 1
Assignable
Basic mode
fig.edt
1
Press the [EDIT] button.
The display will indicate “EDT.”
fig.r-1
2
Slightly move the controller to which you want to assign a Note
message. In the case of a button, press that button.
The display will indicate the number of the selected controller.
3
Verify that the display shows the correct controller number, and press the [ENTER] button.
fig.nt0
4
Press the [NOTE] key.
The display will indicate “NT0.”
fig.c
5
Press the [ENTER] button.
The display will indicate “C--.”
6
*1 Reference
Input the channel. Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys to specify the channel.
fig.n
7
Press the [ENTER] button.
The display will indicate “N--.”
8
*1 Reference
Input the note number. Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys to specify the note
number.
9 Press the [ENTER] button.
10 If you are making an assignment for a button, specify the button mode. (➔“Specifying the
button mode” (p. 158))
*1 The -- area displays the currently set value. If it has not been set, the default setting will be displayed. Even if you change the type or mode
of the MIDI message that is assigned, the default setting will be displayed. This will be lit if the value is the same as the currently set value,
or will blink if the value is different.
127
Edit mode (EDIT)
Advanced mode
Advanced mode 1 of NOTE ASSIGN lets you specify the velocity value in addition to the items of
Basic mode.
1. Press the [EDIT] button.
2. Slightly move the controller to which you want to assign a Note message. In the case of
a button, press that button.
The display will indicate the number of the selected controller.
3. Verify that the display indicates the correct controller, and press the [ENTER] button.
4. Press the [NOTE] key and then press key [1].
The display will indicate “NT1.”
5. Press the [ENTER] button.
6. Input the channel.
7. Press the [ENTER] button.
8. Input the note number.
9. Press the [ENTER] button.
fig.v
The display will indicate “V--.”
*1 Reference
10. Input the velocity.
11. Press the [ENTER] button.
fig.p
The display will indicate “P--.”
*1 Reference
12. Specify the output port. (➔“Specifying the port” (p. 159))
13. If you are making an assignment for a button, specify the button mode.
(➔“Specifying the button mode” (p. 158))
• If you set [S1--S8], [R1--R8], or [P2] to NOTE ASSIGN, setting the controller to the
maximum position will transmit the specified velocity value. Setting the controller
to the minimum position will transmit a note message with a velocity of 0.
• If you assign this to [B1--B6] or [P1], the specified velocity value will be transmitted
when you turn the controller on. When you turn the controller off, a note message
with a velocity value of 0 will be transmitted.
128
*1 The -- area displays the currently set value. If it has not been set, the default setting will be displayed. Even if you change the type or mode
of the MIDI message that is assigned, the default setting will be displayed. This will be lit if the value is the same as the currently set value,
or will blink if the value is different.
Edit mode (EDIT)
■ AFTERTOUCH ASSIGN
Here’s how to assign an Aftertouch message to a controller.
Mode
Basic mode
Advanced mode 1
Advanced mode 2
Advanced mode 3
Keyboard
0
1
2
3
Message
Channel Pressure
Channel Pressure
Polyphonic Key Pressure
Polyphonic Key Pressure
Value range
00–7FH
Assignable
00–7FH
Assignable
Port
Port 1
Assignable
Port 1
Assignable
Basic mode
fig.edt
1
Press the [EDIT] button.
The display will indicate “EDT.”
fig.r-1
2
Slightly move the controller to which you want to assign an Aftertouch
message. In the case of a button, press that button.
The display will indicate the number of the selected controller.
3
Verify that the display shows the correct controller number, and press the [ENTER] button.
fig.at0
4
Press the [AFTERTOUCH] key.
The display will indicate “AT0”.
fig.c
5
Verify that the display is correct, and press the [ENTER] button.
The display will indicate “C--”.
6
7
8
*1 Reference
Input the channel. Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys to specify the channel.
Press the [ENTER] button.
If you are making an assignment for a button, specify the button mode. (➔“Specifying the
button mode” (p. 158))
*1 The -- area displays the currently set value. If it has not been set, the default setting will be displayed. Even if you change the type or mode
of the MIDI message that is assigned, the default setting will be displayed. This will be lit if the value is the same as the currently set value,
or will blink if the value is different.
129
Edit mode (EDIT)
Advanced mode 1–3
Advanced mode 1 of AFTERTOUCH ASSIGN lets you specify the upper and lower limits of the
aftertouch value in addition to the items of Basic mode. Advanced modes 2 and 3 let you specify an
aftertouch message for an individual note (Polyphonic Key Pressure) instead of specifying the channel.
1. Press the [EDIT] button.
2. Slightly move the controller to which you want to assign an Aftertouch message. In the
case of a button, press that button.
The display will indicate the number of the selected controller.
3. Verify that the display indicates the correct controller, and press the [ENTER] button.
4. Press the [AFTERTOUCH] key and then press a key [1]–[3].
The display will indicate the selected mode.
fig.at1
5. Press the [ENTER] button.
6. Input the channel.
7. Press the [ENTER] button.
8. If you are using Advanced modes 2 or 3, input the note number.
9. If you are using Advanced modes 2 or 3, Press the [ENTER] button.
10. If you are using Advanced modes 1 or 3, specify the upper limit and lower limit of
the value as described in “Aftertouch Assign upper/lower limit and port settings”
(p. 131), and specify the output port.
11. If you are making an assignment for a button, specify the button mode.
(➔“Specifying the button mode” (p. 158))
130
Edit mode (EDIT)
Aftertouch Assign upper/lower limit and port settings
In the case of Aftertouch Assign 1 or 3, you can set the upper limit and lower limit of the value, and
specify the port.
fig.max
1. The following display will appear.
*1 Reference
2. Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys to specify the upper limit.
3. Press the [ENTER] button.
fig.min
The following display will appear.
*1 Reference
4. Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys to specify the lower limit.
5. Press the [ENTER] button.
fig.p1
The display will indicate “P--”.
*1 Reference
6. Specify the output port. (➔“Specifying the port” (p. 159))
*1 The -- area displays the currently set value. If it has not been set, the default setting will be displayed. Even if you change the type or mode
of the MIDI message that is assigned, the default setting will be displayed. This will be lit if the value is the same as the currently set value,
or will blink if the value is different.
131
Edit mode (EDIT)
■ CONTROL CHANGE ASSIGN
Here’s how to assign a control change message to a controller.
Mode
Basic mode
Advanced mode 1
Advanced mode 2
keyboard
0
1
2
Value range
00–7FH
Assignable
Simulates a rotary encoder
Port
PCR 1
Assignable
Assignable
Basic mode
fig.edt
1
Press the [EDIT] button.
The display will indicate “EDT”.
2
Slightly move the controller to which you want to assign a Control Change message. In the
case of a button, press that button.
fig.r-1
The display will indicate the number of the selected controller.
3
Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.
fig.cc0
4
Press the [CONTROL CHANGE] key.
The display will indicate “CC0”.
fig.c
5
Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.
The display will indicate “C--”.
6
*1 Reference
Input the channel. Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys to specify the channel.
fig.n
7
Press the [ENTER] button.
The display will indicate “N--”.
*1 Reference
8 Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys to specify the control change number.
9 Press the [ENTER] button.
10 If you are making an assignment for a button, specify the button mode. (➔“Specifying the
button mode” (p. 158))
132
*1 The -- area displays the currently set value. If it has not been set, the default setting will be displayed. Even if you change the type or
mode of the MIDI message that is assigned, the default setting will be displayed. This will be lit if the value is the same as the currently
set value, or will blink if the value is different.
Edit mode (EDIT)
Advanced mode 1
Advanced mode 1 of CONTROL CHANGE ASSIGN lets you specify the upper and lower limits of the
control change value in addition to the items of Basic mode.
1. Press the [EDIT] button.
2. Slightly move the controller to which you want
to assign a Control Change message. In the case
of a button, press that button.
The display will indicate the number of
the selected controller.
3. Confirm what’s indicated, and press the
[ENTER] button.
4. Press the [CONTROL CHANGE] key and then
press key [1].
The display will indicate “CC1”.
5. Press the [ENTER] button.
6. Input the channel.
11. Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys
to specify the upper limit value.
12. Press the [ENTER] button.
13. The following display will appear.
fig.min
*1 Reference
14. Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys
to specify the lower limit value.
15. Press the [ENTER] button.
16. The display will indicate “P--”.
fig.p1
*1 Reference
7. Press the [ENTER] button.
8. Input the control change number.
9. Press the [ENTER] button.
10. The following display will appear.
fig.max
17. Specify the output port. (➔“Specifying the
port” (p. 159))
18. If you are making an assignment for a button,
specify the button mode. (➔“Specifying the
button mode” (p. 158))
*1 Reference
*1 The -- area displays the currently set value. If it has not been set, the default setting will be displayed. Even if you change the type or mode
of the MIDI message that is assigned, the default setting will be displayed. This will be lit if the value is the same as the currently set value,
or will blink if the value is different.
133
Edit mode (EDIT)
Advanced mode 2
Advanced mode 2 simulates the operation of a conventional rotary encoder. If this is assigned to a
controller, moving that controller toward the right (upward) of center will have the same effect as
turning the encoder clockwise, and moving the controller toward the left (downward) of center will
have the same effect as turning the encoder counterclockwise. As the controller is moved further away
from the center, the result will be the same as if the rotary encoder were moved more quickly.
You can assign advanced mode 2 to a button, but it will not function.
1. Press the [EDIT] button.
2. Slightly move the controller to which you want to assign a Control Change message.
The display will indicate the number of the selected controller.
3. Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.
4. Press the [CONTROL CHANGE] key and then press key [2].
The display will indicate “CC2”.
5. Press the [ENTER] button.
6. Input the channel.
7. Press the [ENTER] button.
8. Input the control change number. Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys to
specify the control change number.
9. Press the [ENTER] button.
10. The display will indicate “P--”.
*1 Reference
11. Specify the output port. (➔“Specifying the port” (p. 159))
134
*1 The -- area displays the currently set value. If it has not been set, the default setting will be displayed. Even if you change the type or
mode of the MIDI message that is assigned, the default setting will be displayed. This will be lit if the value is the same as the currently
set value, or will blink if the value is different.
Edit mode (EDIT)
■ PROGRAM CHANGE ASSIGN
Here’s how to assign a program change message to a controller.
Mode
Basic mode
Advanced mode 1
Advanced mode 2
Advanced mode 3
Advanced mode 4
Number
0
1
2
3
4
Effect
Fixed value
Assignable range of values
Fixed value
PC DEC
PC INC
Bank
Not output
Not output
Output
Not output
Not output
Port
PCR 1
PCR 1
Assignable
KEYBOARD PORT (p. 154)
KEYBOARD PORT (p. 154)
Basic mode
fig.edt
1
Press the [EDIT] button.
The display will indicate “EDT.”
2
Slightly move the controller to which you want to assign a Program Change message. In the
case of a button, press that button.
fig.r-1
The display will indicate the number of the selected controller.
3
Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.
fig.pc0
4
Press the [PROGRAM CHANGE] key.
The display will indicate “PC0”.
fig.c
5
Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.
The display will indicate “C--”.
6
*1 Reference
Input the channel. Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys to specify the channel.
fig.n
7
Press the [ENTER] button.
The display will indicate “N--”.
8
9
*1 Reference
Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys to specify the program change number.
Press the [ENTER] button.
* If you assign Basic mode to [S1--S8], [R1--R8], or [P2], moving the controller from the minimum to the
maximum position will transmit the assigned control change messages.
*1 The -- area displays the currently set value. If it has not been set, the default setting will be displayed. Even if you change the type or mode
of the MIDI message that is assigned, the default setting will be displayed. This will be lit if the value is the same as the currently set value,
or will blink if the value is different.
135
Edit mode (EDIT)
Advance mode 1, 2
Advanced mode 1 of PROGRAM CHANGE ASSIGN lets you specify the upper and lower limits of the
program change value. Advanced mode 2 lets you transmit BANK LSB/MSB settings in addition to
the program change.
1. Press the [EDIT] button.
2. Slightly move the controller to which you want
to assign a Program Change message. In the
case of a button, press that button. The display
will indicate the number of the selected
controller.
3. Confirm what’s indicated, and press the
[ENTER] button.
Advanced mode 1
—Specifying the range of values
4. Press the [PROGRAM CHANGE] key and then
press key [1].
Advanced mode 2
—Transmitting bank data
4. Press the [PROGRAM CHANGE] key and then
press key [2].
5. Press the [ENTER] button.
6. Input the channel.
7. Press the [ENTER] button.
8. Specify the bank select MSB (CC#00). Use the
[DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys to
specify the MSB.
fig.BANK-2
*1 Reference
5. Press the [ENTER] button.
9. Press the [ENTER] button.
6. Input the channel.
7. Press the [ENTER] button.
8. The following display will appear.
10. Specify the bank select LSB (CC#32). Use the
[DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys to
specify the LSB.
fig.max
fig.BANK-3
*1 Reference
*1 Reference
9. Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys
to specify the upper value limit.
10. Press the [ENTER] button.
11. The following display will appear.
fig.min
*1 Reference
12. Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys
to specify the lower value limit.
11. Press the [ENTER] button.
12. Input the program change number.
13. Press the [ENTER] button.
14. The display will indicate “P--”.
fig.p1
*1 Reference
15. Specify the output port. (➔“Specifying the
port” (p. 159))
13. Press the [ENTER] button.
136
*1 The -- area displays the currently set value. If it has not been set, the default setting will be displayed. Even if you change the type or
mode of the MIDI message that is assigned, the default setting will be displayed. This will be lit if the value is the same as the currently
set value, or will blink if the value is different.
Edit mode (EDIT)
Advanced modes 3 and 4
Advanced mode 3 lets you assign the Program Change Decrement function (PC DEC) to a
controller.
Advanced mode 4 lets you assign the Program Change Increment function (PC INC) to a controller.
1. Press the [EDIT] button.
2. Slightly move the controller to which you want to assign Program Change DEC/INC.
In the case of a button, press that button.
The display will indicate the number of the selected controller.
3. Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.
4. Press the [PROGRAM CHANGE] key and then press key [3] or [4].
5. Press the [ENTER] button.
Program Change Decrement function (PC DEC)
This transmits a program change that is one less than the previously transmitted program
change number.
Program Change Increment function (PC INC)
This transmits a program change that is one greater than the previously transmitted program
change number.
The PC DEC or PC INC is transmitted on the current channel, just as in “Program Change mode
(PROGRAM CHANGE)” (p. 119). The value that is actually transmitted will appear in the display.
* In the explanation here, the "previously transmitted program number" refers to the one that was last
transmitted by Advanced Mode 3 or 4 or in “Program Change mode (PROGRAM CHANGE)”
(p. 119).
* Program changes transmitted by basic mode or advanced modes 1 and 2 will not affect the increment/
decrement functions.
137
Edit mode (EDIT)
■ RPN/NRPN ASSIGN
Here’s how you can assign an RPN or NRPN message to a controller.
Mode
Keyboard
Basic mode
Advanced mode 1
0
1
Data entry MSB
(CC#6) range
00–7FH
Assignable
Data entry LSB
(CC#38) range
Not transmitted
00–7FH
Port
PCR 1
Assignable
fig.edt
1
Press the [EDIT] button.
The display will indicate “EDT”.
2
Slightly move the controller to which you want to assign an RPN or NRPN message. In the
case of a button, press that button.
fig.r-1
The display will indicate the number of the selected controller.
3
4
Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.
Press the [RPN] key.
fig.rp0
The display will indicate “RP0”.
fig.np0
* If you want to assign an NRPN message, press the [NRPN] key. The following
procedure is the same as for RPN.
fig.c
5
Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.
The display will blink “C--”.
6
7
*1 Reference
Input the channel. Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys to specify the channel.
Press the [ENTER] button.
fig.BANK-2
8
9
138
Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys to specify the RPN MSB
(CC#101) or NRPN MSB (CC#99).
*1 Reference
Press the [ENTER] button.
*1 The -- area displays the currently set value. If it has not been set, the default setting will be displayed. Even if you change the type or
mode of the MIDI message that is assigned, the default setting will be displayed. This will be lit if the value is the same as the currently
set value, or will blink if the value is different.
Edit mode (EDIT)
fig.BANK-3
10 Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys to specify the RPN LSB
(CC#100) or NRPN LSB (CC#98).
*1 Reference
11 Press the [ENTER] button.
12 If you are making an assignment for a button, specify the button mode. (➔“Specifying the
button mode” (p. 158))
Advanced mode
In Advanced mode for RPN/NRPN, you can specify the upper and lower limit of the data entry MSB
(CC#6) value when the RPN/NRPN message is transmitted, as well as the various settings available
in Basic mode.
1. Press the [EDIT] button.
11. Press the [ENTER] button.
2. Slightly move the controller to which you want
to assign the RPN or NRPN message. In the case
of a button, press that button.
The display will indicate the number of
the selected controller.
12. The following display will appear.
fig.max
*1 Reference
13. Use the [0]–[F] keys to specify the upper
limit of the data entry MSB (CC#6) value.
3. Confirm what’s indicated, and press the
[ENTER] button.
14. Press the [ENTER] button.
4. Press the [RPN] key and then press key [1].
15. The following display will appear.
*
If you want to assign an NRPN message, press the
[NRPN] key. The following procedure is the same as
for RPN.
5. Press the [ENTER] button.
fig.min
*1 Reference
16. Use the [0]–[F] keys to specify the lower
limit of the data entry MSB (CC#6) value.
6. Input the channel. Use the [DEC][INC] buttons
or the [0]–[F] keys to specify the channel.
17. Press the [ENTER] button.
7. Press the [ENTER] button.
18. The display will indicate “P--.”
fig.p1
8. Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys
to specify the RPN MSB (CC#101) or NRPN
MSB (CC#99).
*1 Reference
9. Press the [ENTER] button.
19. Specify the output port. (➔“Specifying the
port” (p. 159))
10. Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys
to specify the RPN LSB (CC#100) or NRPN LSB
(CC#98).
20. If you are making an assignment for a button,
specify the button mode. (➔“Specifying the
button mode” (p. 158))
*1 The -- area displays the currently set value. If it has not been set, the default setting will be displayed. Even if you change the type or mode
of the MIDI message that is assigned, the default setting will be displayed. This will be lit if the value is the same as the currently set value,
or will blink if the value is different.
139
Edit mode (EDIT)
■ SYS EX. ASSIGN
Here’s how you can assign a system exclusive message to a controller. Advanced mode 2 lets you
assign a single-byte system message (System realtime message, tune request).
Advanced modes 3 and 4 let you assign any desired message.(Input up to 24 bytes)
Mode
number
Keyboard
Mode
Value range
Required ending
Notes/restrictions
Basic mode
Advanced
mode 1
0
Sys Ex. message
Default range
Input F7
1st byte fixed at F0
1
Sys Ex. message
Assignable
Input F7
1st byte fixed at F0
Advanced
mode 2
2
Single byte system message
–
–
Advanced
mode 3
Advanced
mode 4
3
Any desired MIDI message
Default range
4
Any desired MIDI message
Assignable
Specified number of
bytes
Specified number of
bytes
[0–5, 7, 9, D, E ] [DATA]
[CHECKSUM] buttons
are invalid
[CHECKSUM] button is
invalid
[CHECKSUM] button is
invalid
SYS EX. ASSIGN can calculate the checksum automatically, and lets you specify a variable (data)
range or embed a channel/block number within the message. (“Sys Ex. ASSIGN items” (p. 160))
In SYS EX. ASSIGN, the input mode will be HEX mode.
fig.edt
1
Press the [EDIT] button.
The display will indicate “EDT”.
2
Slightly move the controller to which you want to assign the system exclusive message. In the
case of a button, press that button.
fig.r-1
The display will indicate the number of the selected controller.
3
Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.
fig.se0
4
5
Press the [SYSTEM Ex.] key.
If you want to select an Advanced mode, press a key from [1] to [4].
The selected mode will blink in the display.
6
Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.
fig.f0
For Basic mode or Advanced mode 1
The display will blink “F0”, which is the first byte (starting status byte)
of a system exclusive message. (This cannot be changed.)
7
8
9
140
Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.
Use the [0]–[F] keys to input the second byte.
Press the [ENTER] button.
Edit mode (EDIT)
10 Input the third and subsequent bytes in the same way.
11 When you have finished inputting the message, use the keyboard to enter [F] and [7],
specifying the ending status byte “F7”.
12 Press the [ENTER] button.
13 Specify the output port. (➔“Specifying the port” (p. 159))
14 If you are making an assignment for a button, specify the button mode.
(➔“Specifying the button mode” (p. 158))
For Advanced mode 2
The display will indicate “F-.”
7
8
9
Use the [6], [8], [A]–[C], [F] keys to specify the system message.
Press the [ENTER] button.
Specify the output port. (➔“Specifying the port” (p. 159))
For Advanced modes 3 or 4
The display will indicate “L--”.
7
Use the [0]–[F] keys of the keyboard to specify the number (decimal) of bytes
you want to input.
*1 Reference
8 Press the [ENTER] button.
9 Use the [0]–[F] keys to input the first byte.
10 Press the [ENTER] button.
11 Input the second and subsequent bytes in the same way.
12 After you have input the number of bytes you specified in step 7, the PCR-30/50/80 will
check whether the messages you've input are indeed valid MIDI messages. If there is a
problem, the display will indicate “ERR”.
In this case, you should press the [ENTER] button, which takes you back to step 7, where you can
input the values over again.
*1 The -- area displays the currently set value. If it has not been set, the default setting will be displayed. Even if you change the type or mode
of the MIDI message that is assigned, the default setting will be displayed. This will be lit if the value is the same as the currently set value,
or will blink if the value is different.
141
Edit mode (EDIT)
13 In the case of Advanced mode 4, specify the upper and lower limits.
14 Specify the output port. (➔“Specifying the port” (p. 159))
15 If you are making an assignment for a button, specify the button mode. (➔“Specifying the
button mode” (p. 158))
Here are some examples of inputting various actual system exclusive messages.
● GM2 System On
F0 7E 7F 09 03 F7
Here’s how to assign a GM2 System On system exclusive message in Basic mode.
1. Press the [EDIT] button.
The display will indicate “EDT”.
2. Slightly move the controller to which you want to assign the system exclusive
message. In the case of a button, press that button.
The display will indicate the number of the selected controller.
3. Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.
4. Press the [SYSTEM Ex.] key.
The display will indicate “SE0”.
5. Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.
The display will indicate “F0”, which is the first byte (beginning status) of a system exclusive
message. This cannot be changed. (This cannot be changed.)
6. Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.
7. Use the [7] and [E] keys to input the second byte “7E”.
8. Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.
9. Use the [7] and [F] keys to input the third byte “7F”.
10. Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.
Input the fourth and fifth bytes in the same way.
11. Finally, use the [F] and [7] keys to input the ending status byte “F7”.
12. Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.
13. Specify the output port. (➔“Specifying the port” (p. 159))
14. If you are making an assignment for a button, specify the button mode.
(➔“Specifying the button mode” (p. 158))
The GM2 System On message has now been assigned.
142
Edit mode (EDIT)
● Master Volume
F0 7F 7F 04 01 vL vM F7
Since a Master Volume message has a data range of 00 00–7F 7F and we do not need to specify the
range, we will use Basic mode. Since the two bytes of data are in the order of LSB and then MSB,
we will select “DT3” when we input the data.
1. Press the [EDIT] button.
The display will indicate “EDT”.
2. Slightly move the controller to which you want to assign the system exclusive message. In the
case of a button, press that button.
The display will indicate the number of the selected controller.
3. Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.
4. Press the [SYSTEM Ex.] key.
The display will blink “SE0”.
5. Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.
The display will indicate “F0,” which is the first byte (beginning status) of a system exclusive
message. (This cannot be changed.)
6. Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.
7. Use the [7] and [F] keys to input the second byte “7F”.
8. Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.
Input the third, fourth and fifth bytes in the same way.
9. Since the sixth byte is the data area, press the [DATA] key, and then press [3].
The display will indicate “DT3”.
10. Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.
11. Since we selected “DT3” as the sixth byte, the seventh byte will automatically be
allocated as the data area and cannot be modified.
12. Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.
13. Use the [F] and [7] keys to input the ending status byte “F7”.
14. Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.
15. Specify the output port. (➔“Specifying the port” (p. 159))
16. If you are making an assignment for a button, specify the button mode.
(➔“Specifying the button mode” (p. 158))
The Master Volume message has now been assigned.
143
Edit mode (EDIT)
● Bend Pitch Control
fig.checksum
Since the GS Bend Pitch Control message has a data
range of 40H–58H (0–24 semitones), we will select
Advanced mode 1, which lets us specify the range.
Since the data format is one byte, we will select
“DT0” (p. 161) when inserting the data.
Block number
1 byte
F0 41 10 42 12 40 2x 10 DATA SUM F7
Address
Data
Checksum
Checksum calculation region
1. Press the [EDIT] button.
The display will indicate “EDT”.
2. Slightly move the controller to which you want to assign the system exclusive message. In the case of a
button, press that button.
The display will indicate the number of the selected controller.
3. Confirm what’s indicated and press [ENTER].
4. Press the [SYSTEM Ex.] key, and then press the [1] key.
The display will indicate “SE1”.
5. Confirm what’s indicated and press [ENTER].
The display will blink “F0”, which is the first byte (beginning status) of a system exclusive message.
(This cannot be changed.)
6. Confirm what’s indicated and press [ENTER].
7. Use the [4] and [1] keys to input the second byte “41”.
8. Confirm what’s indicated and press [ENTER].
Input the third, fourth and fifth bytes in the same way.
9. Since the sixth byte is the beginning of the checksum calculation area, press the [CHECKSUM] key to specify
this byte as the beginning of the area for which the checksum will be calculated.
10. Confirm what’s indicated and press [ENTER].
11. Input the sixth byte.
12. Since the seventh byte will have “2” in the upper bits and the block number in the lower bits, press [DATA]
three times.
The display will indicate “0BL”.
144
Edit mode (EDIT)
13. To specify “2” for the upper bits, press the [2] key.
The display will indicate “2BL”.
14. Confirm what’s indicated and press [ENTER].
15. In the same way, enter bytes 8.
16. Since the ninth byte is the data area, press the [DATA] key.
The display will indicate “DT0.”
17. Confirm what’s indicated and press [ENTER].
18. Since the ten byte will contain the checksum, press the [CHECKSUM] key to specify the location at which the
checksum will be input.
The display will blink “CS1” (Checksum Type 1).
19. Confirm what’s indicated and press [ENTER].
20. Press the [F] and then [7] keys to input the ending status “F7.”
21. Confirm what’s indicated and press [ENTER].
22. Next, specify an upper limit value of “58” for the data area.
23. Press [ENTER].
24. Specify a lower limit value of “40” for the data area.
25. Press [ENTER].
26. Specify the output port.
(➔“Specifying the port” (p. 159))
27. If you are making an assignment for a button, specify the button mode. (➔“Specifying the button mode”
(p. 158))
The GS Bend Pitch Control message has been assigned.
145
Edit mode (EDIT)
■ TEMPO ASSIGN
You can assign a controller to adjust the speed (20–250) of the F8 Clock message.
* In order to transmit F8 Clock messages, the F8 CLOCK setting must be “ON”.
(➔“F8 CLOCK ON/OFF” (p. 154))
fig.edt
1
Press the [EDIT] button.
The display will indicate “EDT.”
2
Slightly move the controller to which you want to assign TEMPO. In the case of a button,
press that button.
The display will indicate the number of the selected controller.
fig.r-1
3
4
Confirm what’s indicated and press the [ENTER] button.
Press the [TEMPO] key.
The display will indicate “TMP”.
fig.tmp
5
6
Confirm what’s indicated and press the [ENTER] button.
If you are making the assignment for a button, specify the button mode.
(➔“Specifying the button mode” (p. 158))
* In the case of a button, the value will be fixed at maximum (250) for ON, and minimum (20) for OFF.
■ NO ASSIGN
Here’s how you can cancel the message assigned to a controller. Once its assignment is cancelled,
no message will be transmitted when you operate that particular controller.
fig.edt
1
Press the [EDIT] button.
The display will indicate “EDT”.
2
Slightly move the controller whose assignment you want to cancel. In the case of a button,
press that button.
The display will indicate the number of the selected controller.
fig.r-1
3
146
Confirm what’s indicated and press the [ENTER] button.
Edit mode (EDIT)
fig.noa
4
Press the [NO ASSIGN] key.
The display will indicate “NOA”.
5
Press the [ENTER] button.
fig.yes
6
The display will blink “YES,” so press the [ENTER] button once again.
■ ASSIGN COPY
Here’s how a message assigned to a controller can be copied to another controller.
fig.edt
1
Press the [EDIT] button.
The display will indicate “EDT”.
2
Slightly move the controller to which you want to copy the assignment (the “copy
destination”). In the case of a button, press that button.
fig.r-1
The display will indicate the number of the selected controller.
3
4
Confirm what’s indicated and press the [ENTER] button.
Slightly move the controller whose assignment you want to copy (the “copy source”). In
the case of a button, press that button.
fig.cpy
The display will indicate “CPY”.
5
Press the [ENTER] button.
The display will blink the copy-source controller number.
fig.s-1
6
Confirm what’s indicated and press the [ENTER] button.
147
Edit mode (EDIT)
SAVE
Here’s how to save the settings of the current memory into internal memory.
You can save settings into internal memory numbers 1–F.
You cannot save to memory number 0 (GM2).
* After you edit the settings, perform the “SAVE” (p. 148) operation as needed. If you turn off the power
without performing “SAVE”, your changes will be lost.
fig.edt
1
Press the [EDIT] button.
The display will indicate “EDT”.
2
Press the [SAVE] key.
fig.sav
The display will blink “SAV.”
3
Confirm what’s indicated and press the [ENTER] button.
* If the display indicates "PTC", it means that the Save could not be carried out
because the PROTECT setting (p. 62) is on. Turn PROTECT off, and then try
the operation once again from step 1.
4
Select a memory number 1–F. Use the [DEC] [INC] buttons or the [1]–[F] keys to specify
the save-destination memory number.
The specified memory number will blink in the display.
5
Confirm what’s indicated and press the [ENTER] button.
About the memories of the PCR
The PCR has the following sixteen memories.
Memory number 0
Memory number 1
:
Memory number F
GM2 SET
Cannot be saved
User memories (15)
Can be saved
“Current memory” is a location into which you can recall one of these memories.
In order to use one of the saved memories, you must recall it into current memory as described in
“Memory mode (MEMORY)” (p. 121).
The contents of current memory will be lost when you turn off the power. If you have modified the
settings in current memory, perform the “SAVE” operation if you want to keep your changes.
You can set the “STARTUP MEMORY” (p. 154) setting to specify the memory that will be loaded
into current memory when you turn on the power.
148
Edit mode (EDIT)
OMNI
If you turn the Omni setting ON, all messages will be transmitted on the current channel (p. 118)
regardless of the channel that is specified for each controller.
Also, all messages will be transmitted to the “KEYBOARD PORT SET” (p. 154) regardless of
the port that is specified for each controller.
fig.edt
1
Press the [EDIT] button.
The display will indicate “EDT”.
2
Press the [OMNI] key.
fig.omn
The display will blink “OMN”.
3
4
5
6
Confirm what’s indicated and press the [ENTER] button.
The display will show the current setting.
0
OMNI OFF
Messages will be transmitted on the channel and port
specified for each controller.
1
OMNI ON
Messages will be transmitted on the current channel
from the Keyboard Port, regardless of the channel
and port specified for each controller.
Use the [DEC] [INC] buttons or the [0] [1] keys to select the mode.
Press the [ENTER] button.
149
Edit mode (EDIT)
PROTECT
If you turn the Protect setting ON, All Bulk (p. 151) reception and Save (p. 148) operations will
be disabled.
fig.edt
1
Press the [EDIT] button.
The display will indicate “EDT”.
2
Press the [PROTECT] key.
fig.ptc
The display will blink “PTC”.
3
4
5
6
150
Confirm what’s indicated and press the [ENTER] button.
The display will show the current setting.
0
PROTECT OFF
Allow changes.
1
PROTECT ON
Prohibit changes.
Use the [DEC] [INC] buttons or the [0] [1] keys to select the mode.
Press the [ENTER] button.
Edit mode (EDIT)
BULK
Controller assignments can be received or transmitted as bulk data.
* When you transmit or receive Bulk data, the contents of the current memory will be lost. Save the current
memory settings as needed before you perform this operation.
■ Receive mode
fig.edt
1
Press the [EDIT] button.
The display will indicate “EDT”.
2
Press the [BULK] key.
fig.blr
The display will blink “BLR” (Bulk Receive).
3
Confirm what’s indicated and press the [ENTER] button.
fig.rs
The display will indicate “RS”, and the “S” will blink.
4
5
Use the [DEC] [INC] buttons or the [0] [1] keys to select the mode.
0
SINGLE BULK
A memory will be received as bulk data.
The received data will overwrite the current
memory. Memories 1–F will not be affected.
1
ALL BULK
All memories will be received as bulk data.
The received data will overwrite memories 1–F.
Confirm what’s indicated and press the [ENTER] button.
fig.rs1
The third digit of the display will blink, and the PCR-30/50/80 will wait
to receive bulk data.
151
Edit mode (EDIT)
About the display in Bulk mode
fig.bulk-dis
1st digit:
indicates Receive mode or
Transmit mode
Receive
SINGLE
BULK
Waiting to receive
(blinking)
Transmit
ALL
BULK
Waiting to transmit
(blinking)
3rd digit: indicates
Transmitting/Receiving/Waiting states
receiving
Transmitting
2nd digit:
Single Bulk or All Bulk
6
transmitting
Transmit bulk data from your sequencer or other device.
Specify “PCR” (Mac OS 9/8: PCR 1) as the MIDI output device for your sequencer software.
For details on this setting, refer to the manual of your sequencer software.
For details on the port that will be used to transfer bulk data, refer to “About the ports
when using a USB connection” (p. 159).
fig.end
7
When the PCR finishes receiving the bulk data, the display will
indicate “END”.
Error display
fig.err
If the data could not be received correctly, the display will blink “ERR”.
If this occurs, press the [CANCEL] button to cancel the “ERR” display.
Once "ERR" has been dismissed, perform the bulk reception procedure over again, from step 1.
8
152
Confirm what’s indicated and press the [ENTER] button.
Edit mode (EDIT)
■ Transmit mode
fig.edt
1
Press the [EDIT] button.
The display will indicate “EDT”.
2
3
Press the [BULK] key.
Press the [1] key.
fig.blt
The display will blink “BLT” (Bulk Transmit).
4
Confirm what’s indicated and press the [ENTER] button.
fig.ts
The display will indicate “TS”, and the “S” will blink.
5
6
Use the [DEC] [INC] buttons or the [0] [1] keys to select the mode.
0
SINGLE BULK
The currently recalled memory (the current
memory) will be transmitted as bulk data
1
ALL BULK
All memories (memories 1–F) will be transmitted
as bulk data.
Confirm what’s indicated and press the [ENTER] button.
fig.bs-1
7
8
The third digit of the display will blink, and the PCR-30/50/80 will wait
to transmit bulk data.
Press the [ENTER] button.
On your sequencer software, specify “PCR 2” as the MIDI input device. For details on this setting,
refer to the manual of your sequencer software.
For details on the port that will be used to transfer bulk data, refer to “About the ports
when using a USB connection” (p. 159).
fig.end
9
When the PCR finishes receiving the bulk data, the display will
indicate “END”.
10 Confirm what’s indicated and press the [ENTER] button.
153
Edit mode (EDIT)
SYSTEM
Here’s how you can make various system settings for the PCR-30/50/80.
fig.edt
1
Press the [EDIT] button.
The display will indicate “EDT”.
2
Press the [SYSTEM] key.
The display will indicate “SY0”.
fig.sy0
3
Use the [0]–[8] keys to specify the System setting that you want to set,
and then press the [ENTER] button.
Confirm what’s indicated and use the appropriate method to make
the setting.
Keyboard
0
154
Mode
Content of the setting
Default
F8 CLOCK ON/OFF
Specify whether F8 Clock is to be
transmitted.
If “F8 CLOCK ON/OFF” is ON,
specify the default value of the F8
Clock. After the power is turned on,
this tempo will continue to be output
until you move a controller to which
TEMPO is assigned.
If “F8 CLOCK ON/OFF” is ON,
specify the port from which the F8
Clock is to be transmitted.
The value you specify here will be
added to the velocity of the notes
played from the keyboard.
* If the result of the addition would
exceed 7FH, the velocity will be 7FH.
Specify the port from which
messages produced by the BENDER
lever of the keyboard are to be
transmitted.
Turn this ON if you are using certain
applications (such as Pro Tools LE).
When ON, “90 00 7F” will be output
from PCR 2 approximately every
500 ms.
Specify the type of driver used
for USB connection.
Specify the memory that will be
selected when the power is turned
on.
Restore all settings of the PCR-30/
50/80 to their factory-set condition.
OFF
Setting
method
A (p. 155)
120
B (p. 155)
PCR 1
C (p. 155)
0
B (p. 155)
PCR 1
C (p. 155)
OFF
A (p. 155)
Original
Driver
GM2
D (p. 156)
-
F (p. 156)
1
F8 CLOCK DEFAULT
TEMPO
2
F8 CLOCK PORT SET
3
VELOCITY OFFSET
4
KEYBOARD PORT SET
5
H-ACTIVITY ON/OFF
6
USB DRIVER MODE
7
STARTUP MEMORY
8
FACTORY RESET
E (p. 156)
Edit mode (EDIT)
■ Setting method A
Perform steps 1–3.
4
Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0] or [1] keys to switch F8 CLOCK or H-ACTIVITY on/off.
0
1
OFF
ON
The display will indicate either “ON” or “OFF”.
5
Press the [ENTER] button.
■ Setting method B
Perform steps 1–3.
4
Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys to specify the F8 CLOCK DEFAULT
TEMPO or the VELOCITY OFFSET value.
Keyboard
1
3
Mode
F8 CLOCK DEFAULT TEMPO
VELOCITY OFFSET
Value range
20–250
0–127
The display will indicate the value.
5
Press the [ENTER] button.
■ Setting method C
Perform steps 1–3.
4
Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys to specify F8 CLOCK PORT SET or
KEYBOARD PORT SET. (➔“Specifying the port” (p. 159))
The specified port will indicate in the display.
5
Press the [ENTER] button.
155
Edit mode (EDIT)
■ Setting method D
Perform steps 1–3.
4
Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0] or [1] keys to specify the USB DRIVER MODE.
0
Original driver
FPT technology is used to perform high-speed
MIDI transfer. Normally, we recommend that
you use this mode.
1
Generic driver
Select this if you are using the standard MIDI
driver provided by your operating system.
* FPT = Fast Processing Technology for MIDI Transmission:
Effective use is made of the USB bandwidth according to the amount of MIDI data to be
transmitted, ensuring that MIDI data processing will always occur optimally.
5
Press the [ENTER] button.
■ Setting method E
Perform steps 1–3.
4
5
Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0] or [1] keys to specify the GM2/LAST ACCESS
MEMORY setting.
0
GM2 MEMORY
When the PCR starts up, memory number 0 (GM2) will
be loaded into current memory (p. 148) regardless of the
state in which the power was turned off.
1
LAST ACCESS
MEMORY
Upon power-up, the PCR-30/50/80 will recall the
memory that was last recalled or saved into current
memory (p. 148) .
Press the [ENTER] button.
■ Setting method F
Perform steps 1–3.
4
5
6
7
156
The display will indicate “RST”.
Press the [ENTER] button.
The display will blink “YES”.
Press the [ENTER] button.
Appendices
This section contains troubleshooting information and explanations of convenient functions. You
may read this material as necessary.
Convenient functions ........................................................... p. 158
Memory sets .......................................................................... p. 164
Troubleshooting.................................................................... p. 170
MIDI implementation .......................................................... p. 174
Main specifications ............................................................... p. 179
157
Convenient functions
Setting the input mode
fig.hexdec
If you are not in Play mode, you can use one of two ways to input a numerical value
into the PCR-30/50/80; Decimal input mode or Hexadecimal input mode.
If you want to input decimal numbers, press the [DECIMAL] button. If you want to
input hexadecimal numbers, press the [HEX] button. When you turn on the power,
the PCR-30/50/80 will start up in Decimal mode.
Decimal and hexadecimal numbers correspond as follows.
Decimal: ................................................................. 0–127
Hexadecimal: ......................................................... 00–7F
However, for MIDI CH and PROGRAM CHANGE, the values are as follows.
MIDI CH
PROGRAM CHANGE
*
Decimal
1–16
1–128
Hexadecimal
0–F
00–7F
Normally, the display will show three digits when using Decimal input mode. For this reason, there will
be no indication of the parameter you are now inputting, and you may lose track of what you are doing.
If this occurs, you can temporarily switch back to Hexadecimal mode to check the parameter you are
inputting. Then switch back to Decimal mode and continue.
Specifying the button mode
When you make Assign settings (p. 126) in Edit mode to assign a message to a button, you must
specify the operating mode of the button (button mode).
1. Press the [0] or [1] key to select either Latch mode or Toggle mode.
0
1
Latch mode
The setting will turn on when you press the button, and off
when you release it. The button will remain lit while you are
pressing it.
Toggle mode
The setting will alternate on/off each time you press the
button. The button will light when an On message is
transmitted, and will go dark when an Off message is
transmitted.
2. Press the [ENTER] button.
*
158
When you use a button as a controller, turning the button on will transmit the maximum specified value,
and turning it off will transmit the minimum value.
Convenient functions
Specifying the port
When you are making Assign settings (p. 41) in Edit mode and have selected Advanced mode, you
must specify the USB port to which the message assigned to the controller will be sent when using
a USB connection.
1. Press a key [1]–[3] to select the port.
1
PORT 1
Messages will be sent to “PCR 1.”
2
PORT 2
Messages will be sent to “PCR 2.”
3
PORT 1,2
Messages will be sent to both “PCR 1” and “PCR 2.”
2. Press the [ENTER] button.
*
If you are using the PCR-30/50/80 with a MIDI connection, the messages will be transmitted from the
MIDI OUT connector regardless of this port setting.
About the ports when using a USB connection
The ports correspond to the PCR-30/50/80 as follows.
fig.pcr-port
PCR-30/50
PCR-30/50 USB Driver
MIDI OUT device (port name)
USB
EDIROL PCR MIDI OUT
EDIROL PCR
Bulk reception
MIDI IN device (port name)
EDIROL PCR MIDI IN
EDIROL PCR 1
PORT 1
EDIROL PCR 2
PORT 2 /
Bulk transmission
MIDI OUT device
PCR MIDI OUT
(Mac OS 9/8 : PCR MIDI IN, OUT)
PCR
(Mac OS 9/8 : PCR 1)
MIDI IN device
PCR MIDI IN
(Mac OS 9/8 : PCR MIDI IN, OUT)
PCR 1
PCR 2
* As seen from the PCR-30/50/80, each
section of the diagram does the following.
Bulk reception
This section receives bulk data
PORT 1
Of the keyboard, bender level, and
controllers, those assigned to PORT 1
are transmitted from here
PORT 2
Of the keyboard, bender level, and
controllers, those assigned to PORT 2
are transmitted from here
Bulk transmission
This section transmits bulk data
If you specify PCR MIDI OUT as the output port for your sequencer software, the
MIDI messages will be sent from the MIDI OUT connector of the PCR-30/50/80.
This is the Bulk reception port. When receiving bulk data into the PCR-30/50/80,
specify PCR as the output port for your sequencer software.
If you specify PCR MIDI IN as the input port for your sequencer software, MIDI
messages from the MIDI IN connector of the PCR-30/50/80 can be received.
This is the port at which messages from the keyboard, BENDER lever, and controllers will be input.
The keyboard, BENDER lever, and controllers will be mapped to PCR 1 and/or
PCR 2 according to the port setting.
You may find it convenient to specify PCR 1 for messages used to play a software
synthesizer or for realtime recording on a sequencer track, and specify PCR 2 for
messages used to control the sequencer, such as sequencer play/stop or track fader
control. PCR 2 is the bulk transmission port. When transmitting bulk data from the
PCR-30/50/80, specify PCR 2 as the input port for your sequencer software.
159
Convenient functions
Sys Ex. ASSIGN items
■ Specifying the checksum
The PCR-30/50/80 can automatically calculate the checksum of a system exclusive message and
embed it in the message. In order to use this function, you must use the following procedure to
specify the starting location from which the checksum is calculated, and the location at which the
checksum is inserted. You can also select the type of checksum.
For an actual example, please read the Sys Ex.ASSIGN section “Bend Pitch Control” (p. 144)
1. Press the [CHECKSUM] key before you input the byte at which checksum calculation should begin.
fig.css
The display will indicate “CSS” (Checksum Start).
If you press the [CHECKSUM] key once again, “CSS” (Checksum
Start) will be cancelled.
2. Press the [ENTER] button.
3. Continue inputting data.
4. Press the [CHECKSUM] key at the location where the checksum should be inserted.
fig.cs1
The display will indicate “CS1” (Checksum type 1).
5. Press the [ENTER] button.
Checksum types
There are two types of checksum, as follows.
1
CHECKSUM
TYPE 1
This is the method used by Roland and most other
manufacturers
2
CHECKSUM
TYPE 2
Select this if the method other than type 1 is used
Switching the type
If you want to switch to type 2,
press the [2] key after you press
[CHECKSUM] in step 4. To switch
back to type 1, press the [1] key.
[CHECKSUM]
[2]
*1
160
[CHECKSUM]
[1]
Convenient functions
■ Specifying the location of the data
Here’s how to specify the location and data type of the variable portion (data) within a system
exclusive message.
The range of data values will be the default range in the case of Basic mode or Advanced mode 3.
In the case of Advanced modes 1 and 4, you can specify the range of data values.
For an actual example, please read the Sys Ex,ASSIGN section “Master Volume” (p. 143).
1. Press the [DATA] key at the location where you want to input the data.
The display will indicate “DT0”.
2. Use the [0]–[4] keys to select the type of data.
Data
number
Data type
Default range
DT0
7bit
00H–7F
DT1
4bit/4bit
0H/0H–FH/FH
DT2
DT3
DT4
7bit/7bit
(MSB/LSB)
7bit/7bit
(LSB/MSB)
4bit/4bit/
4bit/4bit
00H/00H–7FH/7FH
00H/00H–7FH/7FH
7H/FH/0H/1H–
8H/0H/FH/FH
Target of range setting
Specify the range of data
(00–7FH)
Specify the range of the first
byte (0–FH), second byte is
fixed at 0–FH
Specify the MSB range (00–7F),
LSB is fixed at 00–7F
Specify the MSB range (00–7F),
LSB is fixed at 00–7F
Specify the limits of positive/
negative change as a value
from 00H to FFH, centered on
8000H.
min
8000H
FF
*
max
Example
(specified upper/lower limits)
04–45
(lower limit 4H, upper limit 45H)
0/0–D/F
(lower limit 0H, upper limit DH)
23/00–68/7F
(lower limit 23H, upper limit 68H)
00/23–7F/68
(lower limit 23H, upper limit 68H)
7/F/0/2–8/0/5/0
(lower limit FEH, upper limit 50H)
FF
In the case of DT1--DT4 (data consisting of two or more bytes), a data location will automatically be
allocated for the next byte, and "-DT" will be displayed. (This cannot be changed.)
3. Press the [ENTER] button.
4. If you selected DT1 through DT4, the display will indicate “-DT”.
Press the [ENTER] button.
161
Convenient functions
■ Inputting channel/block data
If a system exclusive message includes a channel or GS block number, here’s how to specify the
type and the value of the upper bits. For the channel and block number, the setting of the current
channel (p. 118) will be inserted as the lower bits. (The block number is not actually a channel, but
corresponds to the “part” within a GS sound module. On the PCR-30/50/80, this corresponds to
the channel for the sake of convenience.)
Current
channel
CH
BL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
0
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
0
A
A
B
B
C
C
D
D
E
E
F
F
For an actual example, refer to “Bend Pitch Control” (p. 144) in the section on the Edit Mode.
1. Press the [DATA] key several times at the location where you want to input the channel/block
number, to select “0CH” for the channel or “0BL” for the block.
fig.csbl
[DATA]
[DATA]
[DATA]
[DATA]
2. Use the [0]–[7] keys to input the value of the upper four bits.
The “0” in the display will change to the numerical value that you input.
3. Press the [ENTER] button.
162
Convenient functions
V-LINK mode
When you press the [V-LINK] button, the
PCR will transmit a V-LINK ON message
and will enter V-LINK mode. When you
press the [V-LINK] button once again, the
PCR will transmit a V-LINK OFF message
and will exit V-LINK mode.
When the PCR enters V-LINK mode, it will
transmit the following parameters to the
V-LINK host.
• Clip Ctrl Rx MIDI ch : 16
• Color Ctrl Rx MIDI ch : 16
• Sender Model Name : EDIROL PCR
In V-LINK mode, the PCR will operate as
follows.
•Messages from the PCR itself will be
transmitted to both the MIDI connector
and the USB connector.
* In V-LINK mode, you cannot use the MIDI
connectors as a USB MIDI interface.
•When you play the keyboard, program
change messages or bank select MSB
messages will be transmitted in addition
to note messages.
* The program change messages and bank
select MSB messages will be transmitted
on channel 16.
Note
Number
C2
C#2
D2
D#2
E2
F2
F#2
G2
G#2
A2
A#2
B2
C3
C#3
D3
D#3
E3
F3
F#3
G3
G#3
A3
A#3
B3
C4
C#4
D4
D#4
E4
F4
F#4
G4
G#4
A4
A#4
B4
C5
C#5
D5
D#5
E5
F5
F#5
G5
G#5
A5
A#5
B5
C6
C#6
D6
D#6
E6
F6
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
Program
Change
1
Bank
Select
MSB
0
2
1
3
4
2
5
3
6
4
7
8
5
9
6
10
11
7
12
8
13
9
14
15
10
16
11
17
18
12
19
13
20
14
21
22
15
23
16
24
25
17
26
18
27
19
28
29
30
31
21
163
Memory sets
With the factory settings, the GM2 set shown in the illustration is assigned to the controllers.
Use the included template.
The following memory sets are also provided.
GM2 set (MEMORY: 0) .............................................(p. 164)
MCR-8 MODE 3(SONAR 2) SET.............................(p. 165)
MCR-8 MODE 3(SONAR 2) - A (MEMORY: 1).......... (p. 165)
MCR-8 MODE 3(SONAR 2) - B (MEMORY: 2) .......... (p. 165)
MCR-8 MODE 3(SONAR 2) - C (MEMORY: 3) .......... (p. 165)
MCR-8 MODE 3(SONAR 2) - D (MEMORY: 4).......... (p. 165)
MCR-8 MODE 4(Cubase 5/SX) SET ......................(p. 166)
MCR-8 MODE 4(Cubase 5/SX) - A (MEMORY: 5).... (p. 166)
MCR-8 MODE 4(Cubase 5/SX) - B (MEMORY: 6) .... (p. 166)
MCR-8 MODE 4(Cubase 5/SX) - C (MEMORY: 7) .... (p. 166)
MCR-8 MODE 4(Cubase 5/SX) - D (MEMORY: 8).... (p. 166)
H-COMPATIBLE (ProTools LE, Digital Performer) SET
(MEMORY: 9) ............................................................. (p. 167)
GS SET........................................................................ (p. 167)
GS-A (MEMORY: A) ...................................................... (p. 167)
GS-B (MEMORY: B)........................................................ (p. 168)
GS-C (MEMORY: C)....................................................... (p. 168)
XG SET........................................................................ (p. 169)
XG-A (MEMORY: D)...................................................... (p. 169)
XG-B (MEMORY: E) ....................................................... (p. 169)
For details on settings for actually using each memory set with your application, refer to the Read Me file for each memory set, located in the
Memory Files folder of the CD-ROM.
You can download the latest additional memory sets from the following website.
■ GM2 set (MEMORY: 0)
fig.gm2-tmp
Parameter
164
Message (Hex.)
R1
R2
R3
R4
FILTER CUTOFF
FILTER RESONANCE
VIBRATO RATE
VIBRATO DEPTH
CC 74(4A)
CC 71(47)
CC 76(4C)
CC 77(4D)
R5
R6
R7
R8
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
L1
L2
L3
P1
P2
VIBRATO DELAY
COARSE TUNING
FINE TUNING
PAN (CHANNEL)
PORTAMENTO TIME
AFTERTOUCH
ENVELOPE ATTACK
ENVELOPE DECAY
ENVELOPE RELEASE
CHORUS
REVERB
VOLUME (CHANNEL)
PROGRAM CHANGE DEC
PROGRAM CHANGE INC
PORTAMENTO ON/OFF
POLY MODE ON
MONO MODE ON
GM2 SYSTEM ON
STOP
START
CONTINUE
HOLD
EXPRESSION
CC 78(4E)
RPN 0/2(00/02)
RPN 0/1(00/01)
CC 10(0A)
CC 5(05)
CHANNEL PRESSURE
CC 73(49)
CC 75(4B)
CC 72(48)
CC 93(5D)
CC 91(5B)
CC 7(07)
PROGRAM CHANGE
PROGRAM CHANGE
CC 65(41)
B0 7F 00
B0 7E 01
F0 7E 7F 09 03 F7
FC
FA
FB
CC 64(40)
CC 11(0B)
Range (Hex.)
Ch.
Por
t
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0(00) - 127(7F)
0/-(00/--) - 127/-(7F/--)
0/0(00/00) - 127/127(7F/7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
min:1(00)
max:128(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
Memory sets
■ MCR-8 MODE 3(SONAR 2) SET
When using this memory set, turn the PCR-30/50/80's OMNI (p. 149) setting OFF.
* To display the external controller toolbar, open Display | Toolbars, and select External Controllers.
MCR-8 MODE 3(SONAR 2) - A (MEMORY: 1)
Parameter
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
L1
L2
L3
P1
P2
TRACK 1
TRACK 2
TRACK 3
TRACK 4
TRACK 5
TRACK 6
TRACK 7
TRACK 8
TRACK 1
TRACK 2
TRACK 3
TRACK 4
TRACK 5
TRACK 6
TRACK 7
TRACK 8
TRACK 1
TRACK 2
TRACK 3
TRACK 4
TRACK 5
TRACK 6
<<
■ Stop
> Play
HOLD
EXPRESSION
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
MCR-8 MODE 3(SONAR 2) - B (MEMORY: 2)
Message
(Hex.)
Range (Hex.)
Ch.
Port
CC 16(10)
CC 16(10)
CC 16(10)
CC 16(10)
CC 16(10)
CC 16(10)
CC 16(10)
CC 16(10)
CC 17(11)
CC 17(11)
CC 17(11)
CC 17(11)
CC 17(11)
CC 17(11)
CC 17(11)
CC 17(11)
CC 80(50)
CC 80(50)
CC 80(50)
CC 80(50)
CC 80(50)
CC 80(50)
CC 82(52)
CC 82(52)
CC 82(52)
CC 64(40)
CC 11(0B)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
13
14
15
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
L1
L2
L3
P1
P2
MCR-8 MODE 3(SONAR 2) - C (MEMORY: 3)
Parameter
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
L1
L2
L3
P1
P2
TRACK 9
*1
TRACK 10
*1
TRACK 11
*1
TRACK 12
*1
TRACK 13
*1
TRACK 14
*1
TRACK 15
*1
TRACK 16
*1
TRACK 9
*2
TRACK 10
*2
TRACK 11
*2
TRACK 12
*2
TRACK 13
*2
TRACK 14
*2
TRACK 15
*2
TRACK 16
*2
TRACK 9
*3
TRACK 10
*3
TRACK 11
*3
TRACK 12
*3
TRACK 13
*3
TRACK 14
*3
Automation Write
■ Stop
Rec
HOLD
EXPRESSION
Range (Hex.)
Ch.
Port
CC 16(10)
CC 16(10)
CC 16(10)
CC 16(10)
CC 16(10)
CC 16(10)
CC 16(10)
CC 16(10)
CC 17(11)
CC 17(11)
CC 17(11)
CC 17(11)
CC 17(11)
CC 17(11)
CC 17(11)
CC 17(11)
CC 80(50)
CC 80(50)
CC 80(50)
CC 80(50)
CC 80(50)
CC 80(50)
CC 82(52)
CC 82(52)
CC 82(52)
CC 64(40)
CC 11(0B)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
13
14
12
14
11
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
Generic Surface Preset
*1
Aux Send 1 Pan
Aux Send 2 Pan
Pan
Pan
TRACK 1
TRACK 2
TRACK 3
TRACK 4
TRACK 5
TRACK 6
TRACK 7
TRACK 8
TRACK 1
TRACK 2
TRACK 3
TRACK 4
TRACK 5
TRACK 6
TRACK 7
TRACK 8
TRACK 1
TRACK 2
TRACK 3
TRACK 4
TRACK 5
TRACK 6
<<
■ Stop
> Play
HOLD
EXPRESSION
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*4
*4
*4
*4
*4
*4
Message
(Hex.)
Range (Hex.)
Ch.
Port
CC 16(10)
CC 16(10)
CC 16(10)
CC 16(10)
CC 16(10)
CC 16(10)
CC 16(10)
CC 16(10)
CC 17(11)
CC 17(11)
CC 17(11)
CC 17(11)
CC 17(11)
CC 17(11)
CC 17(11)
CC 17(11)
CC 81(51)
CC 81(51)
CC 81(51)
CC 81(51)
CC 81(51)
CC 81(51)
CC 82(52)
CC 82(52)
CC 82(52)
CC 64(40)
CC 11(0B)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
13
14
15
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
MCR-8 MODE 3(SONAR 2) - D (MEMORY: 4)
Message
(Hex.)
Roland MCR-8 (Aux Send 1)
Roland MCR-8 (Aux Send 2)
Roland MCR-8 (Mute + Solo)
Roland MCR-8 (Record Arming)
Parameter
Parameter
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
L1
L2
L3
P1
P2
TRACK 9
*1
TRACK 10
*1
TRACK 11
*1
TRACK 12
*1
TRACK 13
*1
TRACK 14
*1
TRACK 15
*1
TRACK 16
*1
TRACK 9
*2
TRACK 10
*2
TRACK 11
*2
TRACK 12
*2
TRACK 13
*2
TRACK 14
*2
TRACK 15
*2
TRACK 16
*2
TRACK 9
*4
TRACK 10
*4
TRACK 11
*4
TRACK 12
*4
TRACK 13
*4
TRACK 14
*4
Automation Write
■ Stop
Rec
HOLD
EXPRESSION
*2
Aux Send 1 Level
Aux Send 2 Level
Volume
Volume
Message
(Hex.)
Range (Hex.)
Ch.
Port
CC 16(10)
CC 16(10)
CC 16(10)
CC 16(10)
CC 16(10)
CC 16(10)
CC 16(10)
CC 16(10)
CC 17(11)
CC 17(11)
CC 17(11)
CC 17(11)
CC 17(11)
CC 17(11)
CC 17(11)
CC 17(11)
CC 81(51)
CC 81(51)
CC 81(51)
CC 81(51)
CC 81(51)
CC 81(51)
CC 82(52)
CC 82(52)
CC 82(52)
CC 64(40)
CC 11(0B)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
13
14
12
14
11
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
*3
Aux Send 1 Pre/Post
Aux Send 2 Pre/Post
Mute
White Arm
*4
Aux Send 1 Enable
Aux Send 2 Enable
Solo
Record Arm
165
Memory sets
■ MCR-8 MODE 4(Cubase 5/SX) SET
When using this memory set, turn the PCR-30/50/80's OMNI (p. 149) setting OFF.
MCR-8 MODE 4(Cubase 5/SX) - A (MEMORY: 5)
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
L1
L2
L3
P1
P2
Parameter
Message
(Hex.)
Range (Hex.)
Ch.
Port
TRACK 1 PAN
TRACK 2 PAN
TRACK 3 PAN
TRACK 4 PAN
TRACK 5 PAN
TRACK 6 PAN
TRACK 7 PAN
TRACK 8 PAN
TRACK 1 FADER
TRACK 2 FADER
TRACK 3 FADER
TRACK 4 FADER
TRACK 5 FADER
TRACK 6 FADER
TRACK 7 FADER
TRACK 8 FADER
TRACK 1 SOLO
TRACK 2 SOLO
TRACK 3 SOLO
TRACK 4 SOLO
TRACK 5 SOLO
TRACK 6 SOLO
<<
■ Stop
> Play
HOLD
EXPRESSION
CC 72(48)
CC 73(49)
CC 74(4A)
CC 75(4B)
CC 76(4C)
CC 77(4D)
CC 78(4E)
CC 79(4F)
CC 64(40)
CC 65(41)
CC 66(42)
CC 67(43)
CC 68(44)
CC 69(45)
CC 70(46)
CC 71(47)
CC 0(00)
CC 1(01)
CC 2(02)
CC 3(03)
CC 4(04)
CC 5(05)
CC 19(13)
CC 21(15)
CC 22(16)
CC 64(40)
CC 11(0B)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
MCR-8 MODE 4(Cubase 5/SX) - C (MEMORY: 7)
Parameter
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
L1
L2
L3
P1
P2
TRACK 9 PAN
TRACK 10 PAN
TRACK 11 PAN
TRACK 12 PAN
TRACK 13 PAN
TRACK 14 PAN
TRACK 15 PAN
TRACK 16 PAN
TRACK 9 FADER
TRACK 10 FADER
TRACK 11 FADER
TRACK 12 FADER
TRACK 13 FADER
TRACK 14 FADER
TRACK 15 FADER
TRACK 16 FADER
TRACK 9 SOLO
TRACK 10 SOLO
TRACK 11 SOLO
TRACK 12 SOLO
TRACK 13 SOLO
TRACK 14 SOLO
<<
■ Stop
Rec
HOLD
EXPRESSION
166
Message
(Hex.)
Range (Hex.)
Ch.
Port
CC 56(38)
CC 57(39)
CC 58(3A)
CC 59(3B)
CC 60(3C)
CC 61(3D)
CC 62(3E)
CC 63(3F)
CC 48(30)
CC 49(31)
CC 50(32)
CC 51(33)
CC 52(34)
CC 53(35)
CC 54(36)
CC 55(37)
CC 32(20)
CC 33(21)
CC 34(22)
CC 35(23)
CC 36(24)
CC 37(25)
CC 20(14)
CC 21(15)
CC 23(17)
CC 64(40)
CC 11(0B)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
MCR-8 MODE 4(Cubase 5/SX) - B (MEMORY: 6)
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
L1
L2
L3
P1
P2
Parameter
Message
(Hex.)
Range (Hex.)
Ch.
Port
TRACK 1 PAN
TRACK 2 PAN
TRACK 3 PAN
TRACK 4 PAN
TRACK 5 PAN
TRACK 6 PAN
TRACK 7 PAN
TRACK 8 PAN
TRACK 1 FADER
TRACK 2 FADER
TRACK 3 FADER
TRACK 4 FADER
TRACK 5 FADER
TRACK 6 FADER
TRACK 7 FADER
TRACK 8 FADER
TRACK 1 MUTE
TRACK 2 MUTE
TRACK 3 MUTE
TRACK 4 MUTE
TRACK 5 MUTE
TRACK 6 MUTE
<<
■ Stop
> Play
HOLD
EXPRESSION
CC 72(48)
CC 73(49)
CC 74(4A)
CC 75(4B)
CC 76(4C)
CC 77(4D)
CC 78(4E)
CC 79(4F)
CC 64(40)
CC 65(41)
CC 66(42)
CC 67(43)
CC 68(44)
CC 69(45)
CC 70(46)
CC 71(47)
CC 40(28)
CC 41(29)
CC 42(2A)
CC 43(2B)
CC 44(2C)
CC 45(2D)
CC 19(13)
CC 21(15)
CC 22(16)
CC 64(40)
CC 11(0B)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
MCR-8 MODE 4(Cubase 5/SX) - D (MEMORY: 8)
Parameter
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
L1
L2
L3
P1
P2
TRACK 9 PAN
TRACK 10 PAN
TRACK 11 PAN
TRACK 12 PAN
TRACK 13 PAN
TRACK 14 PAN
TRACK 15 PAN
TRACK 16 PAN
TRACK 9 FADER
TRACK 10 FADER
TRACK 11 FADER
TRACK 12 FADER
TRACK 13 FADER
TRACK 14 FADER
TRACK 15 FADER
TRACK 16 FADER
TRACK 9 MUTE
TRACK 10 MUTE
TRACK 11 MUTE
TRACK 12 MUTE
TRACK 13 MUTE
TRACK 14 MUTE
<<
■ Stop
Rec
HOLD
EXPRESSION
Message
(Hex.)
Range (Hex.)
Ch.
Port
CC 56(38)
CC 57(39)
CC 58(3A)
CC 59(3B)
CC 60(3C)
CC 61(3D)
CC 62(3E)
CC 63(3F)
CC 48(30)
CC 49(31)
CC 50(32)
CC 51(33)
CC 52(34)
CC 53(35)
CC 54(36)
CC 55(37)
CC 88(58)
CC 89(59)
CC 90(5A)
CC 91(5B)
CC 92(5C)
CC 93(5D)
CC 20(14)
CC 21(15)
CC 23(17)
CC 64(40)
CC 11(0B)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
Memory sets
■ H-COMPATIBLE (ProTools LE, Digital Performer) SET (MEMORY: 9)
When using this memory set, turn the PCR-30/50/80's OMNI (p. 149) setting OFF, and turn the
H-ACTIVITY (p. 154) setting ON.
Parameter
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
L1
L2
L3
P1
P2
ROTARY ENCODER 1
ROTARY ENCODER 2
ROTARY ENCODER 3
ROTARY ENCODER 4
ROTARY ENCODER 5
ROTARY ENCODER 6
ROTARY ENCODER 7
ROTARY ENCODER 8
FADER 1
FADER 2
FADER 3
FADER 4
FADER 5
FADER 6
FADER 7
FADER 8
MUTE 1
SOLO 1
REC 1
WRITE 1
TRACK <
TRACK >
REWIND
STOP
PLAY
HOLD
EXPRESSION
Message (Hex.)
B0 40 dd
B0 41 dd
B0 42 dd
B0 43 dd
B0 44 dd
B0 45 dd
B0 46 dd
B0 47 dd
B0 0F 00 B0 2F 40 B0 00 dd
B0 0F 01 B0 2F 40 B0 01 dd
B0 0F 02 B0 2F 40 B0 02 dd
B0 0F 03 B0 2F 40 B0 03 dd
B0 0F 04 B0 2F 40 B0 04 dd
B0 0F 05 B0 2F 40 B0 05 dd
B0 0F 06 B0 2F 40 B0 06 dd
B0 0F 07 B0 2F 40 B0 07 dd
B0 0F 00 B0 2F dd
B0 0F 00 B0 2F dd
B0 0F 00 B0 2F dd
B0 0F 00 B0 2F dd
B0 0F 0A B0 2F dd
B0 0F 0A B0 2F dd
B0 0F 0E B0 2F dd
B0 0F 0E B0 2F dd
B0 0F 0E B0 2F dd
CC 64(40)
CC 11(0B)
B0 20 00
B0 21 00
B0 22 00
B0 23 00
B0 24 00
B0 25 00
B0 26 00
B0 27 00
B0 0F 00
B0 0F 01
B0 0F 02
B0 0F 03
B0 0F 04
B0 0F 05
B0 0F 06
B0 0F 07
B0 2F 00
B0 2F 00
B0 2F 00
B0 2F 00
B0 2F 00
B0 2F 00
B0 2F 00
B0 2F 00
Range (Hex.)
Ch.
Port
DEC(01) / INC(41)
DEC(01) / INC(41)
DEC(01) / INC(41)
DEC(01) / INC(41)
DEC(01) / INC(41)
DEC(01) / INC(41)
DEC(01) / INC(41)
DEC(01) / INC(41)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
ON(42) / OFF(02)
ON(43) / OFF(03)
ON(47) / OFF(07)
ON(44) / OFF(04)
ON(40) / OFF(00)
ON(42) / OFF(02)
ON(41) / OFF(01)
ON(43) / OFF(03)
ON(44) / OFF(04)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
■ GS SET
When using this memory set, you will find it convenient to turn the PCR-30/50/80's OMNI (p. 149)
setting ON.
GS-A (MEMORY: A)
Parameter
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
L1
L2
L3
P1
P2
REVERB MACRO
REVERB CHARACTER
REVERB PRE-LPF
REVERB TIME
REVERB PREDELAY TIME
REVERB DELAY FEEDBACK
REVERB LEVEL
PART PANPOT
VIBRATO RATE
VIBRATO DEPTH
VIBRATO DELAY
TVF&TVA ENV.ATTACK
TVF&TVA ENV.DECAY
TVF&TVA ENV.RELEASE
REVERB SEND LEVEL
PART LEVEL
PROGRAM CHANGE DEC
PROGRAM CHANGE INC
NRPN ON/OFF
RANDOM PAN
MODE POLY/MONO
GS RESET
STOP
START
CONTINUE
HOLD
EXPRESSION
Message (Hex.)
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 30 dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 31 dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 32 dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 34 dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 37 dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 35 dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 33 dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 1C dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 30 dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 31 dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 37 dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 34 dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 35 dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 36 dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 22 dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 19 dd SUM F7
PROGRAM CHANGE
PROGRAM CHANGE
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 0A dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 1C 00 SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 13 dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 00 7F 00 41 F7
FC
FA
FB
CC 64(40)
CC 11(0B)
Range (Hex.))
Ch.
Port
0(00) - 7(07)
0(00) - 7(07)
0(00) - 7(07)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
1(01) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
min:1 (00)
max:128 (7F)
OFF(00) / ON(01)
MONO(00) / POLY(01)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
BLOCK
BLOCK
BLOCK
BLOCK
BLOCK
BLOCK
BLOCK
BLOCK
BLOCK
BLOCK
BLOCK
BLOCK
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
167
Memory sets
GS-B (MEMORY: B)
Parameter
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
L1
L2
L3
P1
P2
CHORUS MACRO
CHORUS PRE-LPF
CHORUS DELAY
CHORUS RATE
CHORUS DEPTH
CHORUS FEEDBACK
CHORUS LEVEL
PART PANPOT
CHORUS SEND LEVEL TO REVERB
CHORUS SEND LEVEL TO DELAY
TVF CUTOFF FREQ
TVF RESONANCE
MODULATION DEPTH
BEND RANGE
CHORUS SEND LEVEL
PART LEVEL
PROGRAM CHANGE DEC
PROGRAM CHANGE INC
NRPN ON/OFF
RANDOM PAN
MODE POLY/MONO
GS RESET
STOP
START
CONTINUE
HOLD
EXPRESSION
Message (Hex.)
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 38 dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 39 dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 3C dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 3D dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 3E dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 3B dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 3A dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 1C dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 3F dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 40 dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 32 dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 33 dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 2x 04 dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 2x 10 dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 21 dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 19 dd SUM F7
PROGRAM CHANGE
PROGRAM CHANGE
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 0A dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 1C 00 SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 13 dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 00 7F 00 41 F7
FC
FA
FB
CC 64(40)
CC 11(0B)
Range (Hex.)
Ch.
Port
0(00) - 7(07)
0(00) - 7(07)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
1(01) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
64(40) - 88(58)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
min:1 (00)
max:128 (7F)
OFF(00) / ON(01)
MONO(00) / POLY(01)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
BLOCK
BLOCK
BLOCK
BLOCK
BLOCK
BLOCK
BLOCK
BLOCK
BLOCK
BLOCK
BLOCK
BLOCK
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
Range (Hex.)
Ch.
Port
0(00) - 9(09)
0(00) - 7(07)
1(01) - 120(78)
1(01) - 115(73)
1(01) - 120(78)
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
1(01) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
22(34) - 64(40) - 76(4C)
22(34) - 64(40) - 76(4C)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
OFF(00) / ON(01)
200Hz(00) / 400Hz(01)
3kHz(00) / 6kHz(01)
MONO(00) / POLY(01)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
BLOCK
BLOCK
BLOCK
BLOCK
BLOCK
BLOCK
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
GS-C (MEMORY: C)
Parameter
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
L1
L2
L3
P1
P2
168
DELAY MACRO
DELAY PRE-LPF
DELAY TIME RATIO LEFT
DELAY TIME CENTER
DELAY TIME RATIO RIGHT
DELAY FEEDBACK
DELAY LEVEL
PART PANPOT
DELAY SEND LEVEL TO REVERB
DELAY LEVEL LEFT
DELAY LEVEL CENTER
DELAY LEVEL RIGHT
EQ LOW GAIN
EQ HIGH GAIN
DELAY SEND LEVEL
PART LEVEL
EQ ON / OFF
EQ LOW FREQ (200Hz/400Hz)
EQ HIGH FREQ (3kHz/6kHz)
RANDOM PAN
MODE POLY/MONO
GS RESET
STOP
START
CONTINUE
HOLD
EXPRESSION
Message (Hex.)
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 50 dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 51 dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 53 dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 52 dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 54 dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 59 dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 58 dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 1C dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 5A dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 56 dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 55 dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 57 dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 02 01 dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 02 03 dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 2C dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 19 dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 4x 20 dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 02 00 dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 02 02 dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 1C 00 SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 13 dd SUM F7
F0 41 10 42 12 40 00 7F 00 41 F7
FC
FA
FB
CC 64(40)
CC 11(0B)
Memory sets
■ XG SET
When using this memory set, you will find it convenient to turn the PCR-30/50/80's OMNI (p. 149)
setting ON.
XG-A (MEMORY: D)
Parameter
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
L1
L2
L3
P1
P2
BEND PITCH CONTROL
BEND FILTER CONTROL
BEND AMPLITUDE CONTROL
PITCH EG INITIAL LEVEL
PITCH EG ATTACK TIME
PITCH EG RELEASE LEVEL
PITCH EG RELEASE TIME
PAN
BEND LFO PMOD DEPTH
BEND LFO FMOD DEPTH
BEND LFO AMOD DEPTH
REVERB SEND
CHORUS SEND
VARIATION SEND
DRY LEVEL
VOLUME
PROGRAM CHANGE DEC
PROGRAM CHANGE INC
PART MODE NORMAL/DRUM
RANDOM PAN
MONO/POLY MODE
XG SYSTEM ON
STOP
START
CONTINUE
HOLD
EXPRESSION
Message (Hex.)
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 23 dd F7
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 24 dd F7
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 25 dd F7
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 69 dd F7
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 6A dd F7
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 6B dd F7
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 6C dd F7
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 0E dd F7
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 26 dd F7
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 27 dd F7
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 28 dd F7
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 13 dd F7
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 12 dd F7
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 14 dd F7
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 11 dd F7
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 0B dd F7
PROGRAM CHANGE
PROGRAM CHANGE
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 07 dd F7
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 0E 00 F7
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 05 dd F7
F0 43 10 4C 00 00 7E 00 F7
FC
FA
FB
CC 64(40)
CC 11(0B)
Range (Hex.)
Ch.
Port
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)
1(01) - 64(40) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
min:1 (00)
max:128 (7F)
OFF(00) / ON(01)
MONO(00) / POLY(01)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
CURRENT CH
CURRENT CH
CURRENT CH
CURRENT CH
CURRENT CH
CURRENT CH
CURRENT CH
CURRENT CH
CURRENT CH
CURRENT CH
CURRENT CH
CURRENT CH
CURRENT CH
CURRENT CH
CURRENT CH
CURRENT CH
CURRENT CH
CURRENT CH
CURRENT CH
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
Range (Hex.)
Ch.
Port
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
min:1 (00)
max:128 (7F)
OFF(00) / ON(01)
MONO(00) / POLY(01)
0(00) / 127(7F)
0(00) - 127(7F)
CURRENT CH
CURRENT CH
CURRENT CH
CURRENT CH
CURRENT CH
CURRENT CH
CURRENT CH
CURRENT CH
CURRENT CH
CURRENT CH
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
XG-B (MEMORY: E)
Parameter
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
L1
L2
L3
P1
P2
MW PITCH CONTROL
MW FILTER CONTROL
MW AMPLITUDE CONTROL
REVERB PAN
CHORUS PAN
VARIATION PAN
SEND VARIATION TO REVERB
SEND VARIATION TO CHORUS
MW LFO PMOD DEPTH
MW LFO FMOD DEPTH
MW LFO AMOD DEPTH
REVERB RETURN
CHORUS RETURN
VARIATION RETURN
SEND CHORUS TO REVERB
VOLUME
PROGRAM CHANGE DEC
PROGRAM CHANGE INC
PART MODE NORMAL/DRUM
RANDOM PAN
MONO/POLY MODE
XG SYSTEM ON
STOP
START
CONTINUE
HOLD
EXPRESSION
Message (Hex.)
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 1D dd F7
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 1E dd F7
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 1F dd F7
F0 43 10 4C 02 01 0D dd F7
F0 43 10 4C 02 01 2D dd F7
F0 43 10 4C 02 01 57 dd F7
F0 43 10 4C 02 01 58 dd F7
F0 43 10 4C 02 01 59 dd F7
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 20 dd F7
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 21 dd F7
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 22 dd F7
F0 43 10 4C 02 01 0C dd F7
F0 43 10 4C 02 01 2C dd F7
F0 43 10 4C 02 01 56 dd F7
F0 43 10 4C 02 01 2E dd F7
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 0B dd F7
PROGRAM CHANGE
PROGRAM CHANGE
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 07 dd F7
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 0E 00 F7
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 05 dd F7
F0 43 10 4C 00 00 7E 00 F7
FC
FA
FB
CC 64(40)
CC 11(0B)
169
Troubleshooting
Problems common to Windows and Macintosh
Problems occurring only in Windows
Problems occurring only in Macintosh
Problems related to the USB driver
Cannot install the driver correctly
•
Is the CD-ROM correctly inserted into your CD-ROM drive?
Installation is not possible unless the CD-ROM included with the PCR-30/50/80 is inserted in your
CD-ROM drive. Make sure that the CD-ROM is correctly inserted into your CD-ROM drive.
•
Is the CD-ROM or the lens of the CD-ROM dirty?
If the CD-ROM or the lens of the CD-ROM drive is dirty, the installer may not work correctly. Clean
the disc and/or lens using a commercially-available CD cleaner or lens cleaner.
•
Are you installing the software from a networked CD-ROM drive?
The software cannot be installed from a networked CD-ROM drive.
•
Is there sufficient free space on your hard disk?
Delete unneeded files to increase the amount of free space. After deleting the unneeded files, empty
the recycling bin.
•
Is the PCR-30/50/80 connected correctly?
Make sure that the USB connector of your computer is connected to the PCR-30/50/80 by a USB
cable.
•
Is the power of the PCR-30/50/80 turned on?
•
The power switch of the PCR-30/50/80 may have been set to the USB position.
Make sure that the power switch of the PCR-30/50/80 is set to the DC position. Do not use bus
power while installing the driver. Check this, and if you are using Windows, close the Sound and
Multimedia Properties dialog box (Sounds and Audio Devices Properties in Windows XP, and
Multimedia Properties in Windows 98), re-open the same dialog box once again, and specify the
MIDI input/output destinations.
• Using the procedure for “Deleting the driver” (p. 173), delete the USB audio device driver
installed in your computer, and then re-install the PCR-30/50/80 driver as described in “Setup”
(p. 13). Also check whether there is any “Other devices” in “Device Manager” or “Unknown
device” in “Universal Serial Bus Controllers”. If you find any, delete them.
170
Troubleshooting
•
Is OMS or FreeMIDI installed?
The PCR-30/50/80 driver cannot be installed unless OMS or FreeMIDI are installed. Please install
OMS or FreeMIDI. ( ➔ “Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Macintosh)” (p. 25))
PCR-30/50/80 is not detected when making OMS or FreeMIDI
settings
•
Is the PCR-30/50/80 detected?
Turn the power of the PCR-30/50/80 off, then on again.
Reconnect the USB cable.
If other USB devices are connected, connect only the PCR-30/50/80.
It is possible that the Macintosh did not correctly detect and initialize the PCR-30/50/80. Leave the
PCR-30/50/80’s USB cable connected, and restart your Macintosh. If it is still not detected, shut
down your Macintosh, and then restart it.
The PCR-30/50/80 will not be detected if it is connected to the USB connector on the Macintosh
keyboard.
Please connect the PCR-30/50/80 to a USB connector on the Macintosh itself.
“Find new hardware wizard” does not execute automatically
The “Insert Disk” dialog box does not appear
“Find new hardware wizard” ends before the process is
completed
•
It may take about 15 seconds (or more) after the USB cable is connected for the PCR-30/50/80
to be detected.
•
Is the USB cable connected correctly?
Make sure that the PCR-30/50/80 and your computer are correctly connected via a USB cable.
•
Is USB enabled on your computer?
Refer to the operation manual for your computer, and make sure that USB is enabled.
•
It has been found that in some cases, not all of the Windows 98 files required to support
audio via USB are installed when a computer is shipped.
Please contact the manufacturer of your computer.
•
Does your computer meet the USB specifications?
If you are using a computer that does not fulfill the electrical requirements of the USB
specifications, operation may be unstable. In this case, you may be able to solve the problem by
connecting a USB hub.
If the above actions do not solve the problem, it is possible that the PCR-30/50/80 has been
incorrectly detected by the computer. Please reinstall the driver from the beginning of the
procedure. (➔“Setup” (p. 13))
171
Troubleshooting
“Found unknown device” appears even though you installed
the driver
If your computer or USB hub has two or more USB connectors, and you connect the PCR-30/50/80 to
a USB connector to which the PCR-30/50/80 has never been connected before, the “Unknown device”
dialog box may appear even on a computer onto which you have already installed the driver.
Refer to “Setup” (p. 13), and install the driver once again. This is not a malfunction.
If the "Found unknown device" dialog box appears even though the PCR-30/50/80 is connected to
the same USB connector as before, it is possible that the computer has detected the PCR-30/50/80
incorrectly. Please reinstall the driver from the beginning of the procedure. (➔“Setup” (p. 13))
An “Unknown driver found” dialog box appears, and you are
unable to install the driver
Device Manager shows “?”, “!”, or “USB Composite Device”
Driver is not installed correctly
It is possible that the computer has detected the PCR-30/50/80 incorrectly. Please reinstall the
driver from the beginning of the procedure. (➔“Setup” (p. 13))
Can’t install/delete/use the driver in Windows XP/2000
•
Did you log on to Windows as a user with administrative privileges?
In order to install/delete/re-install the driver in Windows XP/2000, you must be logged into
Windows as a user with administrative privileges, such as Administrator. For details, please
contact the system administrator for your computer system.
•
Did you make “Driver Signing Options”?
In order to install/re-install the driver, you must make “Driver Signing Options”.
(Windows XP ➔ p. 14, Windows 2000 ➔ p. 18)
Windows XP/2000 displays a “Hardware Installation” or “Digital
Signature Not Found” dialog box
•
172
Did you make “Driver Signing Options”?
In order to install/re-install the driver, you must make the settings described in “Driver Signing
Options”.
(Windows XP ➔ p. 14, Windows 2000 ➔ p. 18)
Troubleshooting
Deleting the driver
If you were unable to install the driver according to the procedure given, the PCR-30/50/80 may
not be recognized correctly by the computer. In this case, use the following procedure to delete the
driver, and then follow the procedure in “Setup” (p. 13) to install the driver once again.
Windows users
Here's how to uninstall the dedicated driver.
1. Start up Windows with the PCR-30/50/80 disconnected.
Disconnect all USB cables other than a USB keyboard or USB mouse.
* If you are using Windows XP Professional/2000, log on as a user that has
administrative privileges (e.g., Administrator).
2. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of your computer.
3. From the Windows Start menu, choose "Run...".
In the Run dialog box, input the following into the Open field, and click [OK].
Windows XP/2000 users:
D:\DRIVER\USB_XP2K\Uninstal.EXE
Windows Me/98 users:
D:\DRIVER\USB_ME98\Uninstal.EXE
* The drive name D: may be different on your system. Use the drive name for your
CD-ROM drive.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to uninstall the driver.
Macintosh users
1. Turn off the power of the PCR-30/50/80.
Also disconnect the USB cable (by which the PCR-30/50/80 is connected) from your
Macintosh.
2. From the system extensions folder, drag “USB PCR” into the trash to delete it.
3. Delete PCR from the OMS Folder inside the System folder, or drag PCR Driver from the
FreeMIDI Folder inside the System folder to the trash.
4. Restart the Macintosh.
173
MIDI implementation
1. Receive data
2. Transmit data
■System exclusive messages
■ Channel voice messages
●Universal non-realtime system exclusive message
In addition to the channel voice messages that can be transmitted in each mode, the
PCR-30/50/80 lets you assign any channel voice message to any controller and
transmit it.
❍Identity request message
Status
F0H
Data byte
7EH, dev, 06H, 01H
Status
F7H
Byte
F0H
7EH
dev
06H
01H
F7H
Explanation
Exclusive status
ID number (Universal non-realtime system exclusive message)
Device ID (10 or 7FH (Broadcast))
Sub ID #1 (PCR-30/50/80)
Sub ID #1 (PCR-30/50/80)
EOX (End of Exclusive)
●Note off
Status
9nH
2nd byte
kkH
3rd byte
00H
n = MIDI channel number:0H – FH (Ch.1 – 16)
kk = note number: 00H – 7FH (0 – 127)
*
Transmitted when you release a key in Play mode.
●Note on
Status
9nH
●Data transmission
The PCR-30/50/80 can use Bulk Dump (p. 177) to transfer its internal memory set
data (p. 164).
2nd byte
kkH
❍Data Set 1 (DT1)
n = MIDI channel number:
kk = note number:
vv = note on velocity:
These messages transmit the actual data, and are used to transfer data settings to a
device.
*
Status
F0H
Byte
F0H
41H
10H
00H
62H
12H
aaH
ddH
:
:
:
eeH
sum
F7H
*
*
*
Data byte
41H, 10H, 00H, 62H, 12H,
aaH, ddH, ...eeH, sum
3rd byte
vvH
0H – FH (Ch.1 – 16)
00H – 7FH (0 – 127)
01H – 7FH (1 – 127)
Transmitted when you push a key in Play mode.
Status
●Polyphonic key pressure
F7H
Status
AnH
Explanation
Exclusive status
ID number (Roland)
Device ID (For the PCR-30/50/80, fixed at 10H)
Model ID #1 (PCR-30/50/80)
Model ID #1 (PCR-30/50/80)
Command ID (RQ1)
Address
Data
Data
Checksum
EOX (End of Exclusive)
The amount of data that can be transmitted at once is fixed for each type of data.
Data that does not have the specified starting address and data size will not be
received. Refer to the explanation in 3. Bulk Dump (p. 177).
There must be an interval of at least 40 ms between each exclusive message that
is sent.
Also, you must leave an interval of at least 500 ms after transmitting one set of
bulk dump data.
2nd byte
kkH
n = MIDI channel number:
kk = note number:
vv = key pressure:
3rd byte
vvH
0H – FH (Ch.1 – 16)
00H – 7FH (0 – 127)
00H – 7FH (0 – 127)
●Control change
Status
BnH
2nd byte
ccH
n = MIDI channel number:
cc = controller number:
vv = control value:
3rd byte
vvH
0H – FH (Ch.1 – 16)
00H – 77H
00H – 7FH
❍Bank Select (Controller number 0, 32)
Status
BnH
BnH
2nd byte
00H
20H
n = MIDI channel number:
mm = Bank number MSB:
ll = Bank number LSB:
*
3rd byte
mmH
llH
0H – FH (Ch.1 – 16)
00H – 7FH
00H – 7FH
Transmitted in Bank mode.
❍Modulation (Controller number 1)
Status
BnH
2nd byte
01H
3rd byte
vvH
n = MIDI channel number:0H – FH (Ch.1 – 16)
vv = Modulation depth:00H – 7FH (0 – 127)
*
174
Transmitted by upward/downward operation of the BENDER lever in Play
mode.
MIDI implementation
●Program change
■ System common message
Status
CnH
On the PCR-30/50/80 you can assign the following system common messages to
any controller and transmit them.
2nd byte
ppH
n = MIDI channel number:
pp = Program number:
*
0H – FH (Ch.1 – 16)
00H – 7FH (prog. 1 – prog. 128)
●MTC quarter frame
Status
F1H
Transmitted in Program change mode.
2nd byte
mmH
●Channel pressure
mm = Message type/value
Status
DnH
●Song position pointer
2nd byte
vvH
n = MIDI channel number:
vv = Channel pressure:
0H – FH (Ch.1 – 16)
00H – 7FH (0 – 127)
Status
F2H
2nd byte
mmH
mm, ll = Song position:
3rd byte
llH
00 00H - 7F 7FH (0-16383)
●Pitch bend change
Status
EnH
2nd byte
llH
3rd byte
mmH
n = MIDI channel number:
mm, ll = Pitch Bend value:
*
0H – FH (Ch.1 – 16)
00 00H – 40 00H – 7FH 7FH
(-8192 – 0 – +8191)
Transmitted by rightward/leftward operation of the BENDER lever in Play
mode.
■ Channel mode messages
In addition to the channel mode messages that can be transmitted in Panic mode,
the PCR-30/50/80 lets you assign any channel voice message to any controller and
transmit it.
●Channel mode messages
Status
BnH
2nd byte
ccH
n = MIDI channel number:
cc = controller number:
vv = control value:
3rd byte
vvH
0H – FH (Ch.1 – 16)
78H – 7FH
00H – 7FH
●Song select
Status
F3H
mm = Song number:
Status
F6H
■ System realtime message
In addition to the Active Sensing messages that are transmitted constantly, the
PCR-30/50/80 allows you to assign the following system realtime messages (other
than Active Sensing) to any controller and transmit them.
●Start
Status
F8H
*
Transmitted if the System setting F8 CLOCK is ON.
●Start
Status
BnH
Status
FAH
n = MIDI channel number:
*
3rd byte
00H
0H – FH (Ch.1 – 16)
00 00H - 7F 7FH (0-16383)
●Tune request
❍All sounds off (Controller number 120)
2nd byte
78H
2nd byte
mmH
●Continue
Status
FBH
Transmitted in Panic mode.
❍Reset all controllers (Controller number 121)
Status
BnH
2nd byte
79H
n = MIDI channel number:
*
3rd byte
00H
0H – FH (Ch.1 – 16)
❍All notes off (Controller number 123)
2nd byte
7BH
n = MIDI channel number:
Status
FCH
●Active sensing
Transmitted in Panic mode.
Status
BnH
●Stop
3rd byte
00H
Status
FEH
*
*
Transmitted at intervals of approximately 250 ms.
Cannot be assigned to a controller.
0H – FH (Ch.1 – 16)
●System reset
*
Transmitted in Panic mode.
Status
FFH
175
MIDI implementation
■ System exclusive message
❍Sender Model Name
The PCR-30/50/80 is able to transmit the following exclusive messages: exclusive
messages assigned to the controllers, Identity Reply, V-LINK messages, and Bulk
Dump.
Transmitted when entering V-LINK mode.
Status
Data byte
Status
F0H
41H,10H,00H,51H,12H,
F7H
10H,71H,00H,45H,44H,49H,52H,4FH,4CH,
20H,50H,43H,52H,00H,3BH
●Universal non-realtime system exclusive
❍Identity reply
This message will be transmitted when an Identity Request message is received.
Status
F0H
Data byte
7EH,10H,06H,02H,41H,62H,01H,
00H,00H,00H,01H,00H,00H
Status
F7H
Byte
F0H
7EH
10H
06H
02H
41H
62H 01H
00H 00H
00H 01H
00H 00H
F7H
Explanation
Exclusive status
ID number (Universal non-realtime message)
Device ID (For the PCR-30/50/80, fixed at 10H)
Sub ID #1 (General Information)
Sub ID #1 (Identity Reply)
ID number (Roland)
Device family code
Device family number code
Software revision level
:
EOX (End of Exclusive)
●V-LINK message
❍V-LINK ON
Transmitted when entering V-LINK mode.
Status
F0H
Data byte
41H,10H,00H,51H,12H,
10H,00H,00H,01H,0FH,0FH,51H
Status
F7H
Byte
F0H
41H
10H
00H 51H
12H
10H 00H 00H
01H
0FH
0FH
51H
F7H
Explanation
Exclusive status
ID number (Roland)
Device ID (For the PCR-30/50/80, fixed at 10H)
Model ID (V-LINK)
Command ID (DT1)
Address
V-LINK ON
Clip Control Rx. MIDI Ch. (16ch)
Color Control Rx. MIDI Ch. (16ch)
Checksum
EOX (End of Exclusive)
Byte
F0H
41H
10H
00H 51H
12H
aaH
10H 71H 00H
45H 44H 49H
52H 4FH 4CH
20H 50H 43H
52H 00H
3BH
F7H
●Data Set 1 DT1 (12H)
Transmitted when you execute Bulk TX in the Bulk mode.
Status
Data byte
F0H
41H, 10H, 00H, 62H, 12H,
aaH, ddH, ...eeH, sum
Byte
F0H
41H
10H
00H
62H
12H
aaH
ddH
:
:
:
eeH
sum
F7H
*
*
❍V-LINK OFF
*
Transmitted when exiting V-LINK mode.
Status
F0H
Data byte
41H,10H,00H,51H,12H,
10H,00H,00H,00H,70H
Byte
F0H
41H
10H
00H 51H
12H
10H 00H 00H
00H
51H
F7H
Explanation
Exclusive status
ID number (Roland)
Device ID (For the PCR-30/50/80, fixed at 10H)
Model ID (V-LINK)
Command ID (DT1)
Address
V-LINK OFF
Checksum
EOX (End of Exclusive)
176
Status
F7H
Explanation
Exclusive status
ID number (Roland)
Device ID (For the PCR-30/50/80, fixed at 10H)
Model ID (V-LINK)
Command ID (DT1)
Address
Data
Model name (EDIROL PCR)
:
:
:
Checksum
EOX (End of Exclusive)
Status
F7H
Explanation
Exclusive status
ID number (Roland)
Device ID
Model ID #1 (PCR-30/50/80)
Model ID #1 (PCR-30/50/80)
Command ID (RQ1)
Address
Data
Data
Checksum
EOX (End of Exclusive)
The amount of data that can be transmitted at once is fixed for each type of data.
Data that does not have the specified starting address and data size will not be
received. Refer to the explanation in 3. Bulk Dump.
There must be an interval of at least 40 ms between each exclusive message that
is sent.
Also, you must leave an interval of at least 500 ms after transmitting one set of
bulk dump data.
MIDI implementation
3. Bulk dump
Bulk dump allows a large amount of data to be transferred in a single operation.
For example, this can be used to store all settings of a device into a computer or
sequencer.
On the PCR-30/50/80, a bulk dump will be transmitted when you execute the Bulk
mode operation BULK TX. The bulk dump is transmitted as several exclusive
messages.
Address
Parameter
Packets
00H, 00H, 00H, 00H--00H, 00H, 1A, 7F
Current memory
27
* You must leave an interval of at least 40 ms between each exclusive message.
* In the case of ALL BULK, the contents of memories 1--F will be transmitted as
the current memory, consecutively from memory 1 through memory F. After
transmitting one set of bulk dump data, you must leave an interval of at least
500 ms.
* Please be aware that if you modify the data dumped from the PCR-30/50/80 by
changing the order in which the exclusive messages are transmitted, by
inserting other messages between the system exclusive messages, or by
speeding up the timing of the transmission, the data may not be set correctly
when the PCR-30/50/80 receives it.
4. Supplementary material
<Example1>
What is the decimal expression of 5AH?
From the preceding table, 5AH = 90.
<Example2>
What is the decimal expression of the 7-bit hexadecimal value 12 34H?
From the preceding table, 12H = 18, and 34H = 52.
Thus, this is
18 x 128 + 52 = 2356
<Example3>
What is the decimal expression of the nibble-expressed value 0A 03 09 0D?
From the preceding table, 0AH = 10, 03H = 3, 09H = 9, and 0DH = 13.
Thus, this is
((10 x 16 + 3) x 16 + 9) x 16 + 13 = 41885
<Example4> What is the nibble-expressed value of decimal 1258?
1258 ÷ 16 = 78 (quotient) ... 10 (remainder)
78 ÷ 16 = 4 (quotient) ... 14 (remainder)
4 ÷ 16 = 0 (quotient) ... 4 (remainder)
From the preceding table, 0 = 00H, 4 = 04H, 14 = 0EH, 10 = 0HA.
Thus, the nibble-expressed value is
00 04 0E 0AH
●Example of an actual MIDI message
●Decimal and Hexadecimal table
(An “H” is appended to the end of numbers in hexadecimal notation.)
In MIDI documentation, data values and addresses/sizes of Exclusive messages,
etc. are expressed as hexadecimal values for each 7 bits.
The following table shows how these correspond to decimal numbers.
fig.11-22e
Dec.
Hex.
Dec.
Hex.
Dec.
Hex.
Dec.
Hex.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
00H
01H
02H
03H
04H
05H
06H
07H
08H
09H
0AH
0BH
0CH
0DH
0EH
0FH
10H
11H
12H
13H
14H
15H
16H
17H
18H
19H
1AH
1BH
1CH
1DH
1EH
1FH
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
20H
21H
22H
23H
24H
25H
26H
27H
28H
29H
2AH
2BH
2CH
2DH
2EH
2FH
30H
31H
32H
33H
34H
35H
36H
37H
38H
39H
3AH
3BH
3CH
3DH
3EH
3FH
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
40H
41H
42H
43H
44H
45H
46H
47H
48H
49H
4AH
4BH
4CH
4DH
4EH
4FH
50H
51H
52H
53H
54H
55H
56H
57H
58H
59H
5AH
5BH
5CH
5DH
5EH
5FH
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
60H
61H
62H
63H
64H
65H
66H
67H
68H
69H
6AH
6BH
6CH
6DH
6EH
6FH
70H
71H
72H
73H
74H
75H
76H
77H
78H
79H
7AH
7BH
7CH
7DH
7EH
7FH
*
The decimal expression of the MIDI channel, program change, etc., is one
greater than the decimal value shown in the table above.
*
The hexadecimal expression for each 7 bits allows a maximum of 128 steps (0-127) to be expressed by one byte of data. Multiple bytes are used if the data
requires greater resolution than this. For example, a value expressed by two 7bit bytes “aa” and “bbH” would be aa x 128 + bb.
*
In the case of signed (+/-) data, 00H = -64, 40H = +/-0, and 7FH = +63; i.e., a
value 64 less than the decimal value shown in the above table is used. In the case
of a two-byte value, 00 00H = -8192, 40 00 = +/-0, and 7F 7F = +8191. For
example, a value of “aa” and “bbH” would have a decimal expression of aa bbH
- 40 00H = aa x 128 + bb - 64 x 128.
*
In the case of data indicated as “use nibble data,” hexadecimal expression in 4bit units is used. A nibble-expressed value of the two bytes 0a and 0bH would
have a value of a x 16 + b.
<Example1> CE 04
CnH is the Program Change status. “n” is the MIDI channel number. EH = 14, and
04H = 04. Thus, this is a program change message on MIDI channel 15, for program
number 05.
●Checksum calculation
In order to verify that the message was received correctly, Roland exclusive
messages (RQ1, DT1) add a checksum following the end of the data (before the F7).
The checksum value is determined by the address and data (or size) of the
exclusive message that is transmitted.
❍Calculating the checksum
(“H” has been added following hexadecimal values)
The checksum is a value that results in a lower 7 bits of 0 when the address, size,
and checksum itself are added together.
Specifically, the calculation will be as follows when the exclusive message you
want to transmit has an address of aa bb ccH and data or size of dd ee ffH.
aa + bb + cc + dd + ee + ff = total
total ÷ 128 = quotient ... remainder
128 - remainder = checksum
*
However, as an exception, the checksum for a remainder of 0 is not 80H but
rather 00H.
177
MIDI implementation
Date : Nov. 1, 2002
MIDI KEYBOARD CONTROLLER
Model PCR-30/50/80
MIDI Implementation Chart
Transmitted
Function...
Recognized
Basic
Channel
Default
Changed
1
1–16
X
X
Default
Messages
Altered
Mode 3
Mode
X
X
X
OMNI ON/OFF, MONO, POLY
**************
Note
Number : True Voice
**************
X
X
0–127
Velocity
Note On
Note Off
O (9n v=1–127)
O (9n v=0)
X
X
After
Touch
Key's
Channel's
O
O
X
X
O
X
O
X
O (0–127)
**************
X
X
System Exclusive
O
O
: Song Position
System
: Song Select
Common
: Tune Request
O
O (0–127)
O
X
X
X
: Clock
System
Real Time : Commands
O
O
X
X
Pitch Bend
0-119
Version : 1.00
Remarks
Control
Change
Program
Change
: True Number
O *1 (120)
: All Sound Off
: Reset All Controllers O *1 (121)
Aux
O
: Local On/Off
Messages : All Notes Off
O *1 (123)
O
: Active Sensing
O
: System Reset
Notes
Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY
178
X
X
X
X
X
X
* 1 When PANIC is transmitted.
Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO
O : Yes
X : No
Main specifications
■ PCR-30/50/80: MIDI KEYBOARD CONTROLLER
● Keyboard
PCR-30: 32 Keys (with velocity)
PCR-50: 49 Keys (with velocity)
PCR-80: 61 Keys (with velocity)
● Controller
Memory Button
MIDI Channel Button
Program Change Button
Edit Button
V-LINK Button
Octave Shift Button (+/-)
Transpose Button
Assignable Button (B1--6, L1--3)
Bender/Modulation Lever
Assignable Rotary Volume (R1--8)
Assignable Slider (S1--8)
Assignable Pedal (P1--2)
● Display
7 segments, 3 characters (LED)
Power Indicator
● Rear Panel
Power Switch (USB BUS/OFF/DC IN)
● Connectors
Hold Pedal Jack
Expression Pedal Jack
MIDI Jacks (IN/OUT)
USB Jack
DC IN Jack
● Power Supply
DC 9 V (AC Adaptor) or USB Bus Powered
● Current Draw
300 mA (AC Adaptor)
300 mA (USB Bus Power)
● Dimensions
PCR-30:
600 (W) x 232 (D) x 86.4 (H) mm
23-5/8 (W) x 9-3/16 (D) x 3-7/16 (H) inches
PCR-50:
833 (W) x 232 (D) x 86.4 (H) mm
32-13/16 (W) x 9-3/16 (D) x 3-7/16 (H) inches
PCR-80:
1,000(W) x 232(D) x 86.4 (H) mm
39-3/8(W) x 9-3/16 (D) x 3-7/16 (H) inches
● Weight
PCR-30: 2.4 kg / 5 lbs 5 oz (excluding AC adaptor)
PCR-50: 3.3 kg / 7 lbs 5 oz (excluding AC adaptor)
PCR-80: 3.7 kg / 8 lbs 3 oz (excluding AC adaptor)
● Accessories
AC Adaptor (ACP Series)
CD-ROM
USB Cable
Owner's Manual
Template Sheets (GM2/BLANK)
● Options
Pedal Switch: DP Series
Expression Pedal: EV Series
* In the interest of product improvement, the specifications and/or appearance of this unit are subject to
change without prior notice.
179
INDEX
A
AC adaptor ........................................................... 9
AC adaptor jack ................................................. 12
AFTERTOUCH ASSIGN ................................ 129
ALL BULK ................................................ 151, 153
AppleTalk ........................................................... 27
ASSIGN COPY ................................................. 147
B
BANK ................................................................ 120
Bank mode ........................................................ 120
Bank select ........................................................ 120
Bend Pitch Control .......................................... 144
BENDER Lever ................................................... 11
Bevorzugtes Gerät ............................................. 44
Block .................................................................. 162
BULK ................................................................. 151
Bus ........................................................................ 12
Button mode ..................................................... 158
C
Channel ............................................................. 162
Channel Pressure ............................................. 129
checksum ........................................................... 160
CONTROL CHANGE ASSIGN ..................... 132
Controller .............................................. 11–12, 126
Controllers .......................................................... 10
Copy ................................................................... 126
Cubase ............................................................... 166
Current channel ................................................. 10
D
DATA OUT ......................................................... 11
Data Set 1 .................................................. 174, 176
DC ........................................................................ 12
DEC Button ......................................................... 10
DECIMAL ......................................................... 158
Decimal .............................................................. 158
DECIMAL Button .............................................. 11
Default device .................................................... 23
Deleting the driver ........................................... 173
180
Device Manager ............................................... 172
Display ................................................................ 11
Dispositivo predeterminado .......................... 103
Dispositivo preferido ...................................... 103
Driver .................................................................. 13
Driver Signing Options ............................... 14, 18
E
EDIT ................................................................... 125
EDIT Button ........................................................ 10
Edit mode ......................................................... 125
ENTER Button .................................................... 11
Error ................................................................... 152
EXPRESSION ..................................................... 12
F
F8 CLOCK DEFAULT TEMPO ..................... 154
F8 CLOCK ON/OFF ....................................... 154
F8 CLOCK PORT SET ..................................... 154
FACTORY RESET ............................................ 154
Find new hardware wizard ........................... 171
FreeMIDI ............................................................. 29
G
Generic driver .................................................. 156
GM2 System On ............................................... 142
GS ............................................................... 167–168
H
H-ACTIVITY ON/OFF ................................... 154
HEX ............................................................. 11, 158
HEX Button ......................................................... 10
Hexadecimal ..................................................... 158
HOLD .................................................................. 12
I
INC Button ......................................................... 10
Input mode ....................................................... 158
K
KEYBOARD PORT SET .................................. 154
L
Latch mode ....................................................... 158
INDEX
LSB ..................................................................... 120
M
Master Volume ................................................. 143
MCR-8 ........................................................ 165–166
MEMORY .......................................................... 121
MEMORY Button ............................................... 10
Memory mode .................................................. 121
MIDI ................................................................... 114
MIDI CH ................................................... 118, 158
MIDI CH Button ................................................ 10
MIDI Channel mode ........................................ 118
MIDI IN ............................................................. 159
MIDI IN/OUT connectors ................................ 12
MIDI OUT ......................................................... 159
MIDI output ........................................................ 24
MIDI-Ausgabe .................................................... 45
MSB .................................................................... 120
N
NO ASSIGN ...................................................... 146
NOTE ASSIGN ................................................. 127
O
OCTAVE ............................................................. 11
OMNI ................................................................. 149
OMS ..................................................................... 26
Opciones de firma del controlador ........... 94, 98
Options de signature du pilote .................. 55, 59
Opzioni firma driver ................................... 74, 78
Original driver ................................................. 156
P
PANIC ............................................................... 123
Panic mode ....................................................... 123
PCR .................................................................... 159
PCR MIDI IN .................................................... 159
PCR MIDI OUT ................................................ 159
PCR1 .................................................................. 159
PCR2 .................................................................. 159
Periferica predefinita ......................................... 83
Periferica preferenziale ..................................... 83
Périphérique par défaut .................................... 64
PLAY mode ...................................................... 116
Polyphonic Key Pressure ................................ 129
Port .................................................................... 159
Power Indicator ................................................. 10
Power switch ...................................................... 12
Preferred device ................................................. 23
PROGRAM CHANGE ............................ 119, 158
PROGRAM CHANGE ASSIGN .................... 135
PROGRAM CHANGE Button ......................... 10
Program Change mode ................................... 119
PROTECT .......................................................... 150
R
Receive mode ................................................... 151
RPN/NRPN ASSIGN ..................................... 138
S
Salida de MIDI ................................................. 104
SAVE ................................................................. 148
Security Slot ........................................................ 12
SINGLE BULK ......................................... 151, 153
SNAPSHOT ...................................................... 122
Snapshot mode ................................................. 122
SONAR .............................................................. 165
Sortie MIDI ......................................................... 65
Standardgerät ..................................................... 44
STARTUP MEMORY ...................................... 154
SYS EX. ASSIGN .............................................. 140
Sys Ex. ASSIGN ............................................... 160
SYSTEM ............................................................ 154
System exclusive message .............................. 140
System exclusive messages ............................ 174
T
Template sheets ................................................... 9
Toggle mode ..................................................... 158
Transmit mode ................................................. 153
TRANSPOSE ...................................................... 11
TRANSPOSE/ENTER Button ......................... 11
Treibersignaturoptionen ............................. 34, 38
U
Unknown driver found .................................. 172
USB .............................................................. 11, 115
USB cable .............................................................. 9
181
INDEX
USB connector .................................................... 12
USB DRIVER MODE ....................................... 154
Uscita MIDI ......................................................... 84
V
VELOCITY OFFSET ........................................ 154
V-LINK ................................................................ 10
V-LINK Button ................................................... 10
V-LINK mode ..................................................... 10
X
XG ...................................................................... 169
182
To resize thickness, move all items on the front cover
and center registration marks to left or right.
USING THE UNIT SAFELY
The
symbol alerts the user to important instructions
or warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is
determined by the design contained within the
triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for
general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of death or severe
injury should the unit be used
improperly.
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of injury or material
damage should the unit be used
improperly.
* Material damage refers
other adverse effects
respect to the home
furnishings, as well
animals or pets.
to damage or
caused with
and all its
to domestic
001
• Before using this unit, make sure to read the
instructions below, and the Owner’s Manual.
................................................................................................
002c
• Do not open (or modify in any way) the unit
or its AC adaptor.
................................................................................................
003
• Do not attempt to repair the unit, or replace
parts within it (except when this manual
provides specific instructions directing you
to do so). Refer all servicing to your retailer,
the nearest EDIROL/Roland Service Center,
or an authorized EDIROL/Roland
distributor, as listed on the "Information" page.
................................................................................................
004
• Never use or store the unit in places that are:
• Subject to temperature extremes (e.g.,
direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle, near
a heating duct, on top of heat-generating
equipment); or are
• Damp (e.g., baths, washrooms, on wet
floors); or are
• Humid; or are
• Exposed to rain; or are
• Dusty; or are
• Subject to high levels of vibration.
................................................................................................
007
The
symbol alerts the user to items that must never
be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that
must not be done is indicated by the design contained
within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it
means that the unit must never be disassembled.
• Make sure you always have the unit placed
so it is level and sure to remain stable. Never
place it on stands that could wobble, or on
inclined surfaces.
The ● symbol alerts the user to things that must be
carried out. The specific thing that must be done is
indicated by the design contained within the circle. In
the case of the symbol at left, it means that the powercord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.
008c
• Be sure to use only the AC adaptor supplied
with the unit. Also, make sure the line
voltage at the installation matches the input
voltage specified on the AC adaptor’s body.
Other AC adaptors may use a different
polarity, or be designed for a different
voltage, so their use could result in damage,
malfunction, or electric shock.
................................................................................................
009
• Do not excessively twist or bend the power
cord, nor place heavy objects on it. Doing so
can damage the cord, producing severed
elements and short circuits. Damaged cords
are fire and shock hazards!
................................................................................................
011
• Do not allow any objects (e.g., flammable
material, coins, pins); or liquids of any kind
(water, soft drinks, etc.) to penetrate the unit.
For the USA
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Tested To Comply With FCC Standards
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE
Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.
This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.
For Canada
NOTICE
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
AVIS
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
................................................................................................
012c
• Immediately turn the power off, remove the
AC adaptor from the outlet, and request
servicing by your retailer, the nearest
EDIROL/Roland Service Center, or an authorized
EDIROL/Roland distributor, as listed on the “Information” page when:
• The AC adaptor or the power-supply cord has
been damaged; or
• If smoke or unusual odor occurs
• Objects have fallen into, or liquid has been
spilled onto the unit; or
• The unit has been exposed to rain (or otherwise
has become wet); or
• The unit does not appear to operate normally or
exhibits a marked change in performance.
2
For EU Countries
This product complies with the requirements of European Directive 89/336/EEC.
For the USA
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
Compliance Information Statement
Model Name :
Type of Equipment :
Responsible Party :
Address :
Telephone :
PCR-30/50/80
USB MIDI KEYBOARD CONTROLLER
Edirol Corporation North America
425 Sequoia Drive, Suite 114, Bellingham, WA 98226
(360) 594-4276
Information
EUROPE
EDIROL (Europe) Ltd.
Studio 3.4 114 Power Road
London W4 5PY
U. K.
TEL: +44 (0)20 8747 5949
FAX:+44 (0)20 8747 5948
http://www.edirol.com/europe
Deutschland
TEL: 0700 33 47 65 20
France
TEL: 0810 000 371
Italia
TEL: 02 93778329
When you need repair service, call your nearest EDIROL/Roland Service Center or authorized
EDIROL/Roland distributor in your country as shown below.
HONG KONG
BARBADOS
PERU
IRELAND
CYPRUS
Parsons Music Ltd.
8th Floor, Railway Plaza, 39
Chatham Road South, T.S.T,
Kowloon, HONG KONG
TEL: 2333 1863
A&B Music Supplies LTD
12 Webster Industrial Park
Wildey, St.Michael, Barbados
TEL: (246)430-1100
Audionet
Distribuciones Musicales SAC
Juan Fanning 530
Miraflores
Lima - Peru
TEL: (511) 4461388
Roland Ireland
G2 Calmount Park, Calmount
Avenue, Dublin 12
Republic of IRELAND
TEL: (01) 4294444
Radex Sound Equipment Ltd.
17, Diagorou Street, Nicosia,
CYPRUS
TEL: (022) 66-9426
INDIA
Rivera Digitec (India) Pvt. Ltd.
409, Nirman Kendra
Mahalaxmi Flats Compound
Off. Dr. Edwin Moses Road,
Mumbai-400011, INDIA
TEL: (022) 2493 9051
INDONESIA
PT Citra IntiRama
J1. Cideng Timur No. 15J-150
Jakarta Pusat
INDONESIA
TEL: (021) 6324170
KOREA
NORTH AMERICA
CANADA
Roland Canada Music Ltd.
(Head Office)
5480 Parkwood Way Richmond
B. C., V6V 2M4 CANADA
TEL: (604) 270 6626
Roland Canada Music Ltd.
(Toronto Office)
170 Admiral Boulevard
Mississauga On L5T 2N6
CANADA
TEL: (905) 362 9707
U. S. A.
Roland Corporation U.S.
5100 S. Eastern Avenue
Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938,
U. S. A.
TEL: (323) 890 3700
AFRICA
Cosmos Corporation
1461-9, Seocho-Dong,
Seocho Ku, Seoul, KOREA
TEL: (02) 3486-8855
MALAYSIA/
SINGAPORE
Roland Asia Pacific Sdn. Bhd.
45-1, Block C2, Jalan PJU 1/39,
Dataran Prima, 47301 Petaling
Jaya, Selangor, MALAYSIA
TEL: (03) 7805-3263
PHILIPPINES
G.A. Yupangco & Co. Inc.
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue
Makati, Metro Manila 1200,
PHILIPPINES
TEL: (02) 899 9801
TAIWAN
ROLAND TAIWAN
ENTERPRISE CO., LTD.
Room 5, 9fl. No. 112 Chung
Shan N.Road Sec.2, Taipei,
TAIWAN, R.O.C.
TEL: (02) 2561 3339
EGYPT
THAILAND
Al Fanny Trading Office
9, EBN Hagar A1 Askalany
Street,
ARD E1 Golf, Heliopolis,
Cairo 11341, EGYPT
TEL: 20-2-417-1828
Theera Music Co. , Ltd.
330 Soi Verng NakornKasem,
New Road, Sumpantawongse,
Bangkok 10100, THAILAND
TEL: (02) 224-8821
REUNION
Maison FO - YAM Marcel
25 Rue Jules Hermann,
Chaudron - BP79 97 491
Ste Clotilde Cedex,
REUNION ISLAND
TEL: (0262) 218-429
SOUTH AFRICA
Paul Bothner(PTY)Ltd.
Royal Cape Park, Unit 24
Londonderry Road, Ottery 7800
Cape Town, SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: (021) 799 4900
ASIA
CHINA
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
5F. No.1500 Pingliang Road
Shanghai 200090, CHINA
TEL: (021) 5580-0800
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
(BEIJING OFFICE)
10F. No.18 3 Section Anhuaxili
Chaoyang District Beijing
100011 CHINA
TEL: (010) 6426-5050
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
(GUANGZHOU OFFICE)
2/F., No.30 Si You Nan Er Jie
Yi Xiang, Wu Yang Xin Cheng,
Guangzhou 510600, CHINA
TEL: (020) 8736-0428
VIETNAM
SAIGON MUSIC
DISTRIBUTOR
(TAN DINH MUSIC)
138 Tran Quang Khai Street
Dist. 1, Ho Chi Minh City
VIETNAM
TEL: (08) 848-4068
AUSTRALIA/
NEW ZEALAND
AUSTRALIA/
NEW ZEALAND
Roland Corporation
Australia Pty.,Ltd.
38 Campbell Avenue
Dee Why West. NSW 2099
AUSTRALIA
For Australia
Tel: (02) 9982 8266
For New Zealand
Tel: (09) 3098 715
CENTRAL/LATIN
AMERICA
ARGENTINA
Instrumentos Musicales S.A.
Av.Santa Fe 2055
(1123) Buenos Aires
ARGENTINA
TEL: (011) 4508-2700
BRAZIL
Roland Brasil Ltda.
Rua San Jose, 780 Sala B
Parque Industrial San Jose
Cotia - Sao Paulo - SP, BRAZIL
TEL: (011) 4615 5666
CHILE
Comercial Fancy II S.A.
Rut.: 96.919.420-1
Nataniel Cox #739, 4th Floor
Santiago - Centro, CHILE
TEL: (02) 688-9540
COLOMBIA
Centro Musical Ltda.
Cra 43 B No 25 A 41 Bododega 9
Medellin, Colombia
TEL: (574)3812529
CURACAO
Zeelandia Music Center Inc.
Orionweg 30
Curacao, Netherland Antilles
TEL:(305)5926866
TRINIDAD
AMR Ltd
Ground Floor
Maritime Plaza
Barataria Trinidad W.I.
TEL: (868)638 6385
URUGUAY
Todo Musica S.A.
Francisco Acuna de Figueroa 1771
C.P.: 11.800
Montevideo, URUGUAY
TEL: (02) 924-2335
VENEZUELA
Instrumentos Musicales
Allegro,C.A.
Av.las industrias edf.Guitar
import
#7 zona Industrial de Turumo
Caracas, Venezuela
TEL: (212) 244-1122
DOMINICAN REPUBLIC
Instrumentos Fernando Giraldez
Calle Proyecto Central No.3
Ens.La Esperilla
Santo Domingo,
Dominican Republic
TEL:(809) 683 0305
ECUADOR
Mas Musika
Rumichaca 822 y Zaruma
Guayaquil - Ecuador
TEL:(593-4)2302364
EUROPE
AUSTRIA
Roland Elektronische
Musikinstrumente HmbH.
Austrian Office
Eduard-Bodem-Gasse 8,
A-6020 Innsbruck, AUSTRIA
TEL: (0512) 26 44 260
ITALY
Roland Italy S. p. A.
Viale delle Industrie 8,
20020 Arese, Milano, ITALY
TEL: (02) 937-78300
MOCO INC.
No.41 Nike St., Dr.Shariyati Ave.,
Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad
Tehran, IRAN
TEL: (021) 285-4169
NORWAY
ISRAEL
Roland Scandinavia Avd.
Kontor Norge
Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95
Lilleaker N-0216 Oslo
NORWAY
TEL: 2273 0074
Halilit P. Greenspoon & Sons
Ltd.
8 Retzif Ha’aliya Hashnya St.
Tel-Aviv-Yafo ISRAEL
TEL: (03) 6823666
POLAND
MX MUSIC SP.Z.O.O.
UL. Gibraltarska 4.
PL-03664 Warszawa POLAND
TEL: (022) 679 44 19
MUSIC HOUSE CO. LTD.
FREDDY FOR MUSIC
P. O. Box 922846
Amman 11192 JORDAN
TEL: (06) 5692696
PORTUGAL
KUWAIT
Roland Iberia, S.L.
Portugal Office
Cais das Pedras, 8/9-1 Dto
4050-465, Porto, PORTUGAL
TEL: 22 608 00 60
EASA HUSAIN AL-YOUSIFI
& SONS CO.
Abdullah Salem Street,
Safat, KUWAIT
TEL: 243-6399
ROMANIA
LEBANON
FBS LINES
Piata Libertatii 1,
535500 Gheorgheni,
ROMANIA
TEL: (266) 364 609
Chahine S.A.L.
Gerge Zeidan St., Chahine
Bldg., Achrafieh, P.O.Box: 165857
Beirut, LEBANON
TEL: (01) 20-1441
RUSSIA
MuTek
Dorozhnaya ul.3,korp.6
117 545 Moscow, RUSSIA
TEL: (095) 981-4967
BELGIUM/FRANCE/
HOLLAND/
LUXEMBOURG
SPAIN
Roland Central Europe N.V.
Houtstraat 3, B-2260, Oevel
(Westerlo) BELGIUM
TEL: (014) 575811
Roland Iberia, S.L.
Paseo García Faria, 33-35
08005 Barcelona SPAIN
TEL: 93 493 91 00
HONDURAS
CZECH REP.
SWEDEN
Almacen Pajaro Azul S.A. de C.V.
BO.Paz Barahona
3 Ave.11 Calle S.O
San Pedro Sula, Honduras
TEL: (504) 553-2029
K-AUDIO
Kardasovska 626.
CZ-198 00 Praha 9,
CZECH REP.
TEL: (2) 666 10529
Roland Scandinavia A/S
SWEDISH SALES OFFICE
Danvik Center 28, 2 tr.
S-131 30 Nacka SWEDEN
TEL: (0)8 702 00 20
MARTINIQUE
DENMARK
SWITZERLAND
Musique & Son
Z.I.Les Mangle
97232 Le Lamantin
Martinique F.W.I.
TEL: 596 596 426860
Roland Scandinavia A/S
Nordhavnsvej 7, Postbox 880,
DK-2100 Copenhagen
DENMARK
TEL: 3916 6200
Roland (Switzerland) AG
Landstrasse 5, Postfach,
CH-4452 Itingen,
SWITZERLAND
TEL: (061) 927-8383
FINLAND
UKRAINE
Roland Scandinavia As, Filial
Finland
Elannontie 5
FIN-01510 Vantaa, FINLAND
TEL: (0)9 68 24 020
TIC-TAC
Mira Str. 19/108
P.O. Box 180
295400 Munkachevo,
UKRAINE
TEL: (03131) 414-40
GUATEMALA
Casa Instrumental
Calzada Roosevelt 34-01,zona 11
Ciudad de Guatemala
Guatemala
TEL:(502) 599-2888
Gigamusic SARL
10 Rte De La Folie
97200 Fort De France
Martinique F.W.I.
TEL: 596 596 715222
MEXICO
Casa Veerkamp, s.a. de c.v.
Av. Toluca No. 323, Col. Olivar
de los Padres 01780 Mexico
D.F. MEXICO
TEL: (55) 5668-6699
NICARAGUA
Bansbach Instrumentos
Musicales Nicaragua
Altamira D'Este Calle Principal
de la Farmacia 5ta.Avenida
1 Cuadra al Lago.#503
Managua, Nicaragua
TEL: (505)277-2557
GERMANY
Roland Elektronische
Musikinstrumente HmbH.
Oststrasse 96, 22844
Norderstedt, GERMANY
TEL: (040) 52 60090
GREECE
STOLLAS S.A.
Music Sound Light
155, New National Road
Patras 26442, GREECE
TEL: 2610 435400
HUNGARY
Roland East Europe Ltd.
Warehouse Area ‘DEPO’ Pf.83
H-2046 Torokbalint,
HUNGARY
IRAN
JORDAN
OMAN
TALENTZ CENTRE L.L.C.
Malatan House No.1
Al Noor Street, Ruwi
SULTANATE OF OMAN
TEL: 2478 3443
QATAR
Badie Studio & Stores
P.O. Box 62,
Doha, QATAR
TEL: 423554
SAUDI ARABIA
aDawliah Universal
Electronics APL
Corniche Road, Aldossary
Bldg., 1st Floor, Alkhobar,
SAUDI ARABIA
P.O.Box 2154, Alkhobar 31952
SAUDI ARABIA
TEL: (03) 898 2081
SYRIA
Technical Light & Sound
Center
Rawda, Abdul Qader Jazairi St.
Bldg. No. 21, P.O.BOX 13520,
Damascus, SYRIA
TEL: (011) 223-5384
TURKEY
UNITED KINGDOM
Roland (U.K.) Ltd.
Atlantic Close, Swansea
Enterprise Park, SWANSEA
SA7 9FJ,
UNITED KINGDOM
TEL: (01792) 702701
MIDDLE EAST
ZUHAL DIS TICARET A.S.
Galip Dede Cad. No.37
Beyoglu - Istanbul / TURKEY
TEL: (0212) 249 85 10
U.A.E.
Zak Electronics & Musical
Instruments Co. L.L.C.
Zabeel Road, Al Sherooq Bldg.,
No. 14, Grand Floor, Dubai,
U.A.E.
TEL: (04) 3360715
BAHRAIN
Moon Stores
No.16, Bab Al Bahrain Avenue,
P.O.Box 247, Manama 304,
State of BAHRAIN
TEL: 17 211 005
TEL: (23) 511011
As of December 10, 2005 (EDIROL-1)